Pens and types
Date: 2019-08-18T00:00:00+00:00
Keywords: Journalism -- Handbooks; manuals; etc.; Proofreading -- Handbooks

The Project Gutenberg eBook of Pens and types

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this eBook.

Title: Pens and types
or, Hints and helps for those who write, print, read, teach, or learn

Author: Benjamin Drew

Release date: August 18, 2019 [eBook #60126]
Most recently updated: October 17, 2024

Language: English

Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/60126

Credits: Produced by MWS, RichardW, and the Online Distributed
Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This file was
produced from images generously made available by The
Internet Archive/American Libraries.)

*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PENS AND TYPES ***

PENS AND TYPES
OR
HINTS AND HELPS FOR THOSE WHO WRITE, PRINT, READ, TEACH, OR LEARN

PENS AND TYPES OR HINTS AND HELPS FOR THOSE WHO WRITE, PRINT, READ, TEACH, OR LEARN

A NEW AND IMPROVED EDITION BY BENJAMIN DREW

“A portion to Seven, and also to Eight”

BOSTON 1889 LEE AND SHEPARD PUBLISHERS 10 MILK STREET NEXT “OLD SOUTH MEETING HOUSE” NEW YORK CHARLES T. DILLINGHAM 718 AND 720 BROADWAY

Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1889, BY BENJAMIN DREW, In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.

C. J. PETERS & SON, TYPOGRAPHERS AND ELECTROTYPERS, 145 HIGH STREET, BOSTON.

To the Memory OF GEORGE WASHINGTON HOSMER, D.D., MY EARLY FRIEND AND INSTRUCTOR, THIS VOLUME IS AFFECTIONATELY INSCRIBED BY THE AUTHOR.

PUBLISHERS’ ADVERTISEMENT.

Our first edition of “Pens and Types: or Hints and Helps for those who Write, Print, or Read,” was especially prepared for the benefit of persons connected with the press. It had, however, a wide circulation among persons of all professions, and became a reference book in some notable institutions of learning.

A distinguished lady teacher in a neighboring city writes us, “I found the book [“Pens and Types”] of the greatest benefit, both in my work of teaching, and in the writing I occasionally did for the press. It was an invaluable aid to those who were trying to train the young in habits of correctness and accuracy in the use of their mother tongue. Such a work should never be out of print, and I am glad there is to be another edition.” We might refer to many who have expressed similar opinions.

This second edition contains all that was valuable in the first, besides several new chapters and additions, as set forth in the author’s preface: and on account of its past reputation and the merits of the added matter, we bespeak anew the favor of printers and teachers,—of both which professions Mr. Drew may fairly be {p6} considered a representative; and although he has, in his book, kept his personality out of sight, even using the editorial “we,” his fitness for a work of this kind will, we think, be made apparent by a brief sketch of his career.

After a school life in which he paid much attention to Latin and Greek classics, he learned the trade of printer. Soon after attaining his majority, he was employed as teacher of a public school in his native town, Plymouth, Mass., whence he was summoned to Boston, to take three months’ charge of the Bowdoin School, during the illness and consequent absence of Mr. James Robinson. Subsequently he became master in the Otis School, which position he occupied during the whole period of its continuance.

While residing in Boston, Mr. Drew was a correspondent of the “Post,” under the signature of SHANDY; and he also contributed the articles of DR. DIGG and ENSIGN STEBBINGS to Shillaber’s “Carpet Bag.” His contributions were of a humorous character, and are well remembered by many gray-bearded gentlemen of Boston and its environs. From this city, Mr. Drew removed to Minnesota, where he was Principal of the Public Schools of St. Paul.

After twenty years of teaching, Mr. Drew returned to the purlieus of the printing-office, as proof-reader at the University Press, Cambridge, and afterward with John Wilson & Son, and Alfred Mudge & Son.

Next he became proof-reader in the Government {p7} printing-office, at Washington, where for more than nine years he remained, reading press-proofs of the various Government publications, including many volumes issued by the Smithsonian Institution, and giving valuable assistance to the Civil Service Commissioners, in the technical examination of proof-readers for the Government Departments. At the age of seventy-six he retired from public employment, and prepared this second edition for the press. May he live long, and enjoy the reward of an industrious and useful life—and a huge remuneration from an enormous sale of his Second Edition.

THE PUBLISHERS.

PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.

As “man measures man the world over,” so it may be presumed that the experience of a laborer in any one department of literature will, in the general, tally with that of all others occupying a similar position. This volume gives the results of a proof-reader’s experience, and such suggestions derived therefrom as may, he hopes, be useful to all who prepare reading-matter for the press, to all who assist in printing and publishing it, and, finally, to the reading public.

But as a vein of imperfection runs through all human achievement; and as the most carefully issued volume must contain errors,—so this work, if critically examined, may perhaps be found to violate, in some instances, its own rules; nay, the rules themselves may appear to be, in some points, erroneous. Still, the inexperienced, we feel assured, will find herein many things of immediate benefit; and those who need no instruction may have their opinions and their wisdom re-enforced by the examples used in illustration. So, believing that on the whole it will {p10} be serviceable; that it contains “a portion” for “seven, and also” for “eight,” we send this treatise to press. And if its perusal shall incite some more competent person to produce a more valuable work on the topics presented, we shall gladly withdraw, and leave him, so far as we are concerned, the undisputed possession of the field.

PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.

The extensive circulation of the first edition of “Pens and Types,” attested by the worn condition of the stereotype plates, induces the author to present to his friends and the public a new and improved edition, embodying the results of a wider experience.

The most important portions of the first edition have been retained. The chapter on Orthography has been enlarged by the addition of ONE correct and authorized spelling of the many hundreds of doubtful words—words to which writer and printer can give but one form, while lexicographers give two or more. For offices which adopt Webster as the standard, Webster’s first column has been closely followed; and for those which follow Worcester’s style, a list is added, adhering to Worcester’s first column. Some words of the lexicographers’ second columns are also placed in the lists (e. g. draught as well as draft), giving to each word its proper and distinct significations.

Moreover we have in the same chapter placed a list of all the words ending in able and ible which {p12} are to be found in ordinary English dictionaries,—whether words in common use or rare or obsolete,—a feature which compositors and many others will know how to appreciate.

A chapter on the Right Use of Capitals, with rules and examples; and another on Old Style and its ligatures, with fac-similes from ancient specimens of typography, give additional value to this edition.

The index at the end of the volume will enable the reader to find at once any particular rule or direction contained in the body of the work.

Although originally intended for authors and printers, this volume will, we are confident, be in many respects a valuable reference-book for teachers and pupils in the public schools, and in seminaries of learning generally.

CONTENTS.

- I. Writing for the Press •  15
- II. Proof-reading •  33
- III. Style •  59

- IV. General Remarks on Subject-matter
of Foregoing Three Chapters •  66

- V. Punctuation •  71
- VI. Orthography • 125
- VII. Capitalization • 171
- VIII. Old Style • 195
- IX. Technical Terms used in this Work • 202
- X. Various Sizes of Letter • 205
- INDEX • 207

PENS AND TYPES.

CHAPTER I. WRITING FOR THE PRESS.

In an action recently brought against the proprietors of Lloyd’s paper, in London, for damages for not inserting a newspaper advertisement correctly, the verdict was for the defendant, by reason of the illegibility of the writing.

“The illegibility of the writing” is the cause of the larger portion of what are conveniently termed “errors of the press.” One can scarcely take up a periodical publication without finding, from editor or correspondent, an apology for some error in a previous issue, couched somewhat in this style: “The types made us say, in our last, something about the ‘Dogs of the Seine’, we certainly wrote ‘Days of the League.’” We have no doubt that, in a large majority of cases of this sort, if the question between “the types” and “the pen” were left to a jury, they would, as in the case of Lloyd’s paper, decide in favor of the types.

By dint of hard study, by comparison of letters in {p16} various words, and by the sense of the context, the compositor generally goes through his task creditably, in spite of the “illegibility of the writing.” But sometimes, in despair, he puts into type that word which most nearly resembles an unreadable word in the manuscript, making nonsense of the passage because he can make nothing else of it. We remember a great many instances of this sort, in our own experience as a proof-reader,—instances which, according to custom, might be attributed to “the types,” but which were really due to the writers’ carelessness alone. Thus, in a medical work, it was stated that “This case had been greatly aggravated by the ossification of warm poultices to the face”; the author having intended to write “application.”

Ames’s “Typographical Antiquities” has been made to figure as “Typographical Ambiguities,”—owing to chirographical ambiguity.

“The reports in the ‘Times’ and other journals, never give the name of the Lord Chandler.” “Chancellor” was, of course, intended by the writer, but this was an “error of the press.”

In an investigation touching the field of a compound microscope, a witness was made to say, “It would vary with the power of the lye-juice employed.” The reporter meant to write “eye-piece,” but he succeeded in writing what the compositor set up.

The title of a book,—“A Treatise on the Steam-engine; with Theological Investigations on the Motive Power of Heat.” The latter clause might seem appropriate to “Fox’s Book of Martyrs”; but the {p17} transcriber of the title imagined he had written “Theoretical.”

A toast,—“The President of the —— County Agricultural Society,—May he enjoy a grim old age”: the word was corrected to “green,” before the whole edition of the paper was worked off.

We have seen an advertisement of “Mattlebran’s Universal Geography,”—no doubt a very entertaining work.

In a treatise on botany, we have been told, “we first find those that form the bud, then the calx, the corrola, the stamina and pistol.” The writer should have spelled correctly, and dotted his i’s.

A catalogue of hardware to be sold by auction had an item, “3 bbls. English pocket-knives.” This was set from “commercial” writing, in which “bbls.,” or something like it, was used as a contraction for “bladed.”

“Nature intended man for a social being. Alone and isolated, man would become impatient and peevish.” No doubt this is true, but “the types” were to blame again,—the author fancied that he had written “impotent, and perish.”

The constitution of a certain corporation appeared with the following article in the proof-sheet: “The Directors shall have power to purchase, build, equip or charter all such steamboats, propellers, or other vessels, as the engineers of the Corporation shall in their judgment require.” Why the Directors should be placed at the mercy of the engineers seemed unaccountable. But a critical examination of the {p18} manuscript revealed that the “engineers” were “exigencies.”

A “Bill of exceptions, having been examined, and found unfavorable to the truth, is allowed.” The Justice who signed the above, understood the word which we have italicized to be “conformable.”

“They could not admit those parts of the testimony until they had examined the plaintiff in regard to the poets,”—“facts” should have been written instead of “poets”; but the “pen” made an error which the compositor did not feel at liberty to correct.

We have read in a newspaper a description of a battle-field:—“It was fearful to see: the men fell in ranks, and marched in pantaloons to their final account.” This was explained by an erasure and a blot on the word “platoons.”

It is very easy to say that errors of the kind we have recited, are owing to the ignorance or carelessness of the printers; but, on the other hand, when printed copy is reset, such errors almost never occur,—and the absence of errors is in direct ratio to the legibility of the copy.

Men who write much, generally imagine that they write well; but their imagination is often a vain one. The writer of the worst manuscript we recollect to have met with, expressed surprise when told that printers and proof-readers could not read his writing, and remarked that he had often been complimented on the plainness and neatness of his chirography. His memory was, no doubt, excellent,—the {p19} compliments must have been bestowed in his juvenile days, when he was imitating engraved copies.

While one is imitating a copy, he may, indeed, write legibly, nay, even elegantly; for he has nothing to attend to, save the formation of the letters. But when one is writing a report or a sermon or a poem, his mind is busy with something besides chirography.

The fact is, that men seldom succeed well in doing more than one thing at a time. The itinerant musician who imitates the various instruments of a full band, may be detected in an occasional discord. Paley remarks that we cannot easily swallow while we gape; and, if any one will try the experiment, he will presently be satisfied that in this statement, at least, Paley was physiologically and philosophically correct.

Thus, in the haste of composition, ideas crowding upon us faster than the pen can give them permanence, we can bestow little thought on mere chirography, writing becomes mechanical, or even automatic; and we pay scarcely more attention to the forms that follow the pen, than we do to the contractions and dilatations of the vocal organs when engaged in conversation with an entertaining friend.

Let school training and practice be the same, yet such are the differences of physical conformation that handwritings are as various as the individuals that produce them; running through all degrees of the scale, from an elegance transcending the engraver’s skill, down to misshapen difficulties and puzzling deformity. {p20}

But however widely our handwriting may vary from Wrifford, Spencer, or Dunton, it is generally legible to ourselves, and soon becomes familiar to our friends and acquaintances. Hence comes the danger that we shall cease to bestow any care upon it when others than ourselves and acquaintances are concerned, and hence it is, that, with scarcely any consciousness of our shortcomings, we are liable to impose on an utter stranger the task of deciphering a piece of manuscript in which not only the letters have no proper characterization, but which is smutched with erasures, deformed by interlineations, and obscured by frequent and needless abbreviations.

The loss of time spent in endeavoring to read such a document, is reckoned among the “small things” of which “the law takes no cognizance”; were it otherwise, many of us who fancy that our manuscript is above reproach, would be astonished at the number of bills collectible outstanding against us.

The opinion of the “statists,” spoken of in Hamlet, that it is “a baseness to write fair,” seems prevalent even in our day. Most men, on leaving school, instead of endeavoring to improve their chirography, allow it to deteriorate, and seem to take pride in its deteriority, and many learned men write as if afraid that legibility would be considered a proof of intellectual weakness.

In all other cases of encroaching on the time and patience of another,—as, for instance, our failure to fulfill an appointment, or calling at an unseasonable hour, or seeking advice in an affair wholly our {p21} own,—we feel bound to make due apology, nay, sometimes even acknowledge a sense of shame; but who ever felt regret on hearing that he had put some one to the trouble of studying, and guessing at, a puzzling intricacy of cramped writing; his victim being obliged to seek aid from dictionaries, gazetteers, directories, and even experts? We never heard of a man’s suffering compunction on this score.

We say this, referring to ordinary business transactions between man and man, where bad writing, except in rare and extreme cases, does not involve pecuniary loss. But when we are writing for the press, our duty to write legibly becomes imperative; indeed, a failure in this respect trenches so closely upon a violation of the eighth commandment, that it can seldom happen but from a want of thought as to the relation between those who write and those who print.

Compositors usually work by the piece, and are paid a fixed rate per thousand ems. If a line of type be divided by vertical lines into equal squares, these squares show the number of ems in the line. Suppose there are twenty such squares; then fifty lines would contain one thousand ems. To set, correct, and distribute six thousand ems, is considered a fair day’s work. With plain, legible copy, this can ordinarily be done; and, at the close of the week, the compositor receives full wages; all parties are satisfied, and no one is entitled to complain.

But if, at the end of the week, notwithstanding the closest application, the compositor has averaged {p22} but four thousand ems per day, whereby he receives but two-thirds of the sum he is capable of earning under favorable conditions, who is morally responsible to him for the lacking third? We need not go far to ascertain: a glance at his “copy” answers the question. He has been laboring upon bad manuscript. To show the difficulties which have been in his way, we will put a supposititious case,—closely paralleled, however, in the experience of almost every compositor who has worked in a book-office.

He has been setting up a sermon of the Rev. Mr. Z. The society of the reverend gentleman were so well pleased with the discourse, that they requested a copy for the press. Mr. Z. should, of course, have copied the whole manuscript fairly; for, the haste of composition being past, he could have re-written it carefully, paying especial attention to chirography, spelling out his abbreviations, reducing dislocations, bringing interlineations into line,—in short, he should have done to the compositor what he would that the compositor should do unto him. But, instead of this, what did you do, Mr. Z.? Pen in hand, you re-read the sermon, making erasures, striking out some words and interlining others. You crowded new sentences, of two or three lines each, between lines already closely written; and you interlined these interlineations. You then wrote sundry additions on loose pieces of paper, denoting them as “A,” “B,” “C,” etc., and then placed the same capitals in the body of the work, without sufficiently explaining that new matter was to be inserted; {p23} neither did you make it appear whether the addenda were to constitute new paragraphs. And in this amorphous condition you allowed the sermon to go to the printing-office. It has, too, passed through several hands. Some of the pieces belonging to “A” have got into “B,” and some of the “B” have straggled into “C,”—and the printers cannot say where they do belong.

One compositor finds in his “take”[1] the abbreviation “Xn,” and, after many inquiries, learns that X is the Greek Chi, and so “Xn” signifies “Christian.” Another hesitates at a phrase which, to his eye, seems to read “a parboiled skeptic”; but as modern methods with heretics do not include heated applications, he asks those about him what the word is; perhaps goes to the proof-reader with it,—such things are done sometimes,—for the compositor expects ultimately to conform to the proof-reader’s decision,—and thus he loses five or ten minutes in learning that the word is purblind. Now, reverend sir, the compositor’s time is his money, and if you rob him of his time—the inference is obvious. Your better course, henceforth, will be to copy your manuscript, or employ some one to copy it, in a careful, painstaking manner, after all your emendations of the text have been made.

1 For this and all other technical terms used in this work, see Chapter IX.

There is a proverb to the effect that lawyers are bad penmen, but we think the proverb unjust. So far as our experience goes, the handwriting of {p24} lawyers compares favorably with that of any other class of persons, of whatever profession. It is certainly as legible as the mercantile style; since the latter, although generally pretty to look at, is often very difficult to read,—abounding in flourish and ornament, which are too often but another name for obscurity. Sometimes, too, one meets with clerkly invoices or catalogues, containing remarkably fanciful capitals; we have seen good readers scarcely able to decide whether a given initial were a W, an H, or an N. We are pleased to learn, however, that one leading “Commercial College” has introduced a marked improvement in this respect, and now teaches its pupils a plain, legible hand, instead of a mass of overloaded ornamentation made not so much to be read, as simply to be admired.

But members of the bar, like most other persons, dislike the mechanical labor of copying what they have once committed to paper. Their arguments, and especially their briefs, are sometimes sent to the printer in a confused, chaotic mass; in a shape, or, rather, with a want of shape, which, if not resulting from inconsiderateness, would be—we were on the point of saying—disgraceful. A manuscript of this sort, covering but six or eight pages of letter-paper, sometimes requires several hours’ labor in reading, correcting, and revising, before a presentable proof can be obtained.

Legal documents are often interlarded with technical terms in law Latin and old French. Of course such terms ought to be made as plain as print. {p25} Usually the principal divisions of a brief are indicated by large roman numerals in the middle of the line; the points under these greater divisions, by roman numerals at the commencement of paragraphs; smaller divisions, by arabic numerals; and if still smaller divisions are required, these are denoted by letters in parenthesis, as (a), (b), (c), etc. In the haste of writing, however, it is sometimes found difficult, perhaps vexatious, to keep the run of so nice distinctions, and arabic numerals are used throughout, while no proper care is taken to distinguish the various divisions of the subject-matter by varying indentions.[2] The faults of the manuscript reappear in the proof. This leads to much loss of time “at the stone”; and as such work is frequently hurried during the sessions of the courts, the delay is exceedingly vexatious to all parties concerned. If one-eighth of the time now spent in correcting, overrunning the matter, and revising, were bestowed upon perfecting the copy, there would seldom be any delay in a well-appointed printing-office.

2 We do not mean “indentation” nor yet “inden’tion,” but “indention,” as written in the text. The word is in the mouth of every printer, proof-reader, author, and publisher: why should it not be inserted in the dictionaries?

When transcripts of records of court are to be printed, care should be taken that only the very documents that are intended for the press be sent to the printing-office. For want of proper attention in this matter, it not unfrequently happens that certificates of notaries, extraneous documents, and duplicates are put in type, to be presently canceled. {p26}

We have said something above, touching mercantile handwriting. Constant practice with the pen gives facility and boldness of execution,—and where these are combined with good taste, chirography approaches the dignity of a fine art, and produces beautiful effects, and is seen to be near of kin to drawing and painting. In signatures, especially, flourish and ornamentation have a double use; they please the eye, and they baffle the forger. But when lines stand as near each other as in ordinary ruling, the flourish in one line interferes with the letters of the next; and the elegance of a well-cut capital will scarcely excuse its obtrusiveness, when it obliterates its more obscure but equally useful neighbors.

Further, business men, deeply impressed with the value of time, learn to delight in abbreviations. Types have been cast to meet some of these, as the “commercial a” [@] and the “per cent” [%]; but the compositor is sometimes put to his trumps to cut, from German and job letter, imitations of abbreviations which never ought to be sent to a printing-office as copy. We are not astonished that a merchant of Boston once received from a Prussian correspondent a request, that if he, the Bostonian, were to write again, it might be either in German or in good, plain English. We adopt the spirit of this advice; and would say to the banker, the broker, the merchant, and to their respective clerks, that when they write for the press, they should drop ornament, drop pedantic abbreviations, drop German, and write in plain English. {p27}

We do not know that there is anything specially characteristic in copy furnished by the medical faculty, unless it be that their relations of “cases,” both in medicine and surgery, abound, no doubt necessarily, in “words of learned length”; which, being unfamiliar to the laity, should be written with conscionable care; every letter performing its proper function, and duly articulated to its neighbors. But the scientific terms of their art, as written by most physicians, are, to the average printer, as illegible as the Greek from which a portion of such terms is derived. Recipes are seldom got typographically correct, until they have passed through three or four revisions. Even apothecaries, it is said, sometimes put up morphine instead of magnesia; in which case, unless the revising is done in a hurry with the stomach-pump, a jury may have something to say about the “illegibility of the writing.” When troublesome consequences arise from misapprehension of a Latin word, or of its meaning, we hear much said in favor of writing recipes in English.

But, whatever may be said to the contrary, there are weighty, and, we think, irrefutable arguments for continuing the use of Latin and Greek terms in medical writings,—even in recipes. Since it should be so, and certainly is so, we insist here, as elsewhere, that all technical terms, proper names, or any words on which the context can throw but little, if any, light, should be written not with ordinary, but with cardinary care,—which new word we hazard, that our meaning may make a deeper impression. {p28}

In passing, we may remark that the mode of indicating names of remedies comes under the head of “Style” (see Chapter III.), and varies in different offices. Names of medicines are often abbreviated, and set in italics; and when a generic word is used, it should be capitalized; as, “Dr. I. administered Rhus tox.” In homeopathic works, the number expressing a dilution or trituration is placed in superiors at the right; as, “Ordered Cuprum metallicum^100.”

A few suggestions to those who write any kind of copy for the press, will close this part of our subject.

Write on only one side of the paper.

If you wish to make an addition to a page, do not write it on the back of the sheet; cut the leaf, and paste the new matter in, just where it belongs, being careful not to cover up so much as a single letter in doing so: we have known lines to be omitted by the compositor, in consequence of careless pasting. The leaf having thus been lengthened, you may, for the sake of convenience, fold the lower edge forward upon the writing. This minute direction may seem idle; but when a portion of the leaf has been folded backward, out of sight, the folded part may very likely escape notice, and, to insert it, many pages of matter may afterward require to be overrun: we have known such cases.

Abbreviate those words only, which you wish the printer to abbreviate.

Never erase with a lead pencil; for an erasure with lead leaves it questionable whether or not the marked {p29} word is to go in. Use ink, drawing the pen horizontally through the words or lines to be omitted; and be careful that the marking leave off on exactly the right word. If you afterward regret the cancellation, you may write “stet” in the margin, and place dots under the canceled words; but as “stet” may not be noticed, in the presence of obvious erasures, the better way will be to re-write the passage, and paste it in the place you wish it to occupy.

Take time to write plainly and legibly. In writing for the press, the old adage holds good,—“The more haste, the worse speed”; and for every hour you save by writing hurriedly, you will be called upon to pay for several hours’ labor in making corrections. Write joinhand: mistakes often arise from a long word being broken up, as it were, into two or three words.

I and J are often mistaken for each other. Either imitate the printed letters, or uniformly carry the loop of the J below the line.

It is often impossible to distinguish Jan. from June, in manuscript, unless the context furnishes a clew.

Whatever may be the divisions of your work (as books, chapters, sections, cantos, and the like), let your entire manuscript be paged in the order of the natural series of numbers from 1 upward. If you commence each division with 1,—as is sometimes done,—and two or three divisions are given out as “takes” to compositors, it is obvious that portions of one division may exchange places with those of another; and, further, if leaves happen to become transposed, they can readily be restored to their right {p30} places if no duplicate numbers have been used in indicating the pages.

Make sure that the books, chapters, etc., are numbered consecutively. The best proof-reader must confess to some unguarded moments; and it would be very awkward, after having had two hundred and forty chapters stereotyped, to find that two chapter V.’s have been cast, that every subsequent chapter is numbered one less than it should have been, and that compositor and proof-reader have exactly followed copy.

Examine your manuscript carefully with reference to the points. Avoid the dash when any other point will answer your purpose. A manuscript that is over-punctuated occasions more perplexity than one that is scarcely pointed at all.

Before sending it to press, get your manuscript into a shape you can abide by. Alterations made on the proof-sheet must be paid for; and, further, matter that has undergone alterations seldom makes a handsome page: some lines will appear crowded, others too widely spaced.

In writing a footnote¹ let it immediately follow

¹ In many works the footnotes, by a slight change of arrangement, might advantageously become a portion of the text.

the line of text which contains the asterisk, or other reference-mark; just as you see in the above example, and do not write it at the bottom of the manuscript page. The person who makes up the matter will transfer such note to its proper place.

If you feel obliged to strike out a word from the {p31} proof, endeavor to insert another, in the same sentence, and in the same line if possible, to fill the space. So, if you insert a word or words, see whether you can strike out, nearly at the same place, as much as you insert.

When writing for the press, never use a lead pencil. Let your copy be made with black ink on good white paper. We have been pained to see the checkered pages of a report to an extensive religious association, which report had been in the first place wholly written with a lead pencil: then words canceled, words interlined, various changes made,—and all these alterations done with pen and ink. Of course, sleeve and hand rubbing over the plumbago gave the whole a dingy and blurred appearance. The effect of the ink sprinkled among the faded pencilings was so much like that of mending an old garment with new cloth, that the manuscript had an unchristian, nay, even heathenish aspect. However, from this copy the report was printed,—let us charitably hope that it did much good in the world.

If proof-sheets present peculiarities of spelling and language, such for instance as appear in ancient works, and which are affected or indulged in by some moderns, every word whose correctness he doubts and is unable to verify, should be referred by the proof-reader to author or editor. The latter, familiar with the terms used, may consider some queries frivolous or puerile; but an author should appreciate conscientiousness in the reader, and be glad to have {p32} all doubts settled before his work reaches the eyes of reviewers.

That Dr. Johnson was guilty of harshness toward a proof-reader is not to be wondered at; but it is a matter of wonder that his conduct appears to have been approved by other editors. In J. T. Buckingham’s edition of Shakspeare (1814) is, at page 915, a remarkable note, apologizing for a few “trifling errors,” and adopting as an excuse a quotation from an advertisement “from the first edition of Reed, 1793”:

He, whose business it is to offer this unusual apology, very well remembers to have been sitting with Dr. Johnson, when an agent from a neighboring press brought in a proof sheet of a republication, requesting to know whether a particular word in it was not corrupted. “So far from it, sir,” (replied the Doctor with some harshness,) “that the word you suspect, and would displace, is conspicuously beautiful where it stands, and is the only one that could do the duty expected from it by Mr. Pope.”

Dr. Johnson’s assumption that the agent would displace the word, seems to have been wholly gratuitous. The employees of the neighboring press did precisely what they should have done,—what every conscientious proof-reader often feels obliged to do. If suspected words were passed without questioning, there would be many errors of the press which would justify some show of “harshness” toward the neglectful “agent.”

CHAPTER II. PROOF-READING.

So long as authors the most accomplished are liable to err, so long as compositors the most careful make occasional mistakes, so long as dictionaries authorize various spellings, just so long must there be individuals trained and training to detect errors, to rectify mistakes, and to decide upon and settle all points which lexicographers leave in doubt. Such individuals are known as Proof-readers.

Movable types, after having been used in printing newspaper or book, etc., are distributed to their several compartments (boxes) for future use. In distributing, the compositor, holding several lines in his left hand, takes from the top line, between the thumb and forefinger of his right hand, as many words or letters as he can conveniently manipulate, and moving his hand over the case drops each letter into its proper box. Suppose, for instance, he takes up the word “feasible”; he carries his hand to the “f” box, and drops off the first letter; of course he knows, without looking at the word again, that he is next to drop off the “e”—and so, very quickly, his hand glides from box to box, each receiving its proper letter. This process is repeated until the {p34} types which composed the form are all, apparently, returned to the compartments whence they were taken.

Suppose, however, that when ready to distribute “feasible,” his attention is drawn momentarily to a neighbor who desires his opinion as to a blotted word in his take, and that, on returning to his work of distributing, he imagines, or seems to remember, that the word in hand is “fencible,”—the “a” goes into the “n” box, and the “s” finds itself at “c.” By and by, in setting type from this same case, the compositor picks up the letters for “emancipate.” If he happens to take up the two wrong letters consecutively from the right boxes, his proof-sheet—unless he reads and corrects the matter in his stick—will present the word “emaasipate”—which the proof-reader will mark, for the compositor to correct.

Or it may happen in distributing, that the “f” and “e” cohere, and are both dropped into the “f” box. If the compositor’s mind is not intent on the matter in hand, the error may not be noticed at once; in which case the “a” gets into the “e” box, and some or all the other letters of the word go wrong. The error must be discovered when the last letter is reached; but to search for each misplaced type until it is found, would probably take more time than would be required to correct the errors which must otherwise appear in the proof.

But it is not in distributing only, that blunders occur. There are many other sources of error, and will be so long as present methods continue in vogue. {p35} The only wonder is, that so few errors escape detection before the printer’s work is handed over to the reading public. We have by us an octavo Shakspeare, each page of type from which it was printed, having contained, as can be demonstrated, over six thousand pieces of metal, the misplacing of any one of which would have caused a blunder.

But the detection and marking of wrong letters forms a comparatively small part of a proof-reader’s duty. He must be able to tell at sight whether a lead is too thick or too thin, and to discriminate between a three-em space and a four-em space. Many other important matters fall within his province,—and these we shall endeavor to point out before closing the present chapter.

Other things being equal, printers make the best proof-readers. We have known two or three remarkably skillful readers, whose work could not be surpassed, who never imposed a form, nor set a line of type. These, however, were rare exceptions.

A practical printer who never heard of the digamma, and who has never read anything but newspapers, will generally make a better proof-reader than an educated man who is not practically acquainted with the typographic art; for the printer has, year in and year out, had a daily drill which makes him skillful in orthography, and he has been compelled to give close attention to the grammatical points. Further, his dealing with individual types enables him to see, without searching, errors which men far more learned than he, do not readily {p36} perceive; and his pen pounces on a wrong letter as instinctively and unerringly as the bird darts on its insect prey.

Sterne has uttered a sneer at the husk and shell of learning; but the best bread is made from the whole meal, and includes the “shorts” and the “middlings” as well as the fine flour. If every lawyer, physician, and clergyman were to spend six months at the “case” before entering upon his profession, he would find, even in that short term of labor, a useful fitting and preparation for such literary tasks as may afterward devolve upon him.

Nearly all manuscript copy is indebted to the compositor and proof-reader for the proper punctuation; and many errors in spelling, made by men who probably know better, but write hastily, are silently corrected in the printing-office. Contradictions, errors of fact, anachronisms, imperfect sentences, solecisms, barbarisms, are modestly pointed out to the author by the proof-reader’s “quære,” or by a carefully worded suggestion; and, most usually, the proof is returned without comment,—and none is needed,—corrected according to the proof-reader’s intimations. Dickens, and a few other writers of eminence, have acknowledged their indebtedness in such cases; but we know one proof-reader—whose experience embraces an infinite variety of subjects from bill-heads to Bibles—who can remember but three cases in which his assistance, whether valuable or otherwise, was alluded to in a kindly manner. On the other hand, the correction in the proof is sometimes {p37} accompanied by some testy remark: as, “Does this suit you?” or, “Will it do now?” The proof-reader is, however, or should be, perfectly callous to all captious criticisms and foolish comments; he need care nothing for “harshness” or other nonsense, provided his work is well and thoroughly done. Let no nervous or touchy man meddle with proof-reading.

For the especial benefit of our non-professional readers, we will here point out the usual routine in regard to proofs. The editor or publisher of a book or periodical sends to the printer such portions of reading-matter or manuscript as he can, from time to time, conveniently supply. This copy is passed to a head-workman, who divides it into a number of parts, called “takes,” each part being a suitable quantity for a compositor to take at one time; and the name of each compositor is penciled at the top of his take. The type when set up is called “matter.”

When there is enough matter to fill a “galley” (a metallic or wooden casing about two feet in length), an impression, or “proof,” is taken on a strip of paper wide enough to receive in the margin the correction of such errors as may be found. This proof, with the corresponding copy, is carried to the proof-reader’s desk for examination and correction.

The reader will have at hand a copy of such directions as may have been furnished by author, editor, or publisher, to which he appends, from time to time, memoranda of all eccentricities of orthography and capitalization,—in short, all peculiarities of style, as they arise. This he consults frequently while {p38} reading the proof-sheet, and, for obvious reasons, with especial attention after any unusual delay in the progress of the work. Directions and notes as to captions, sizes of type, form of tables, etc., are of utility, especially when several readers are employed on the same publication; but directions can scarcely be framed so as to ensure[3] uniformity, except in few particulars. We subjoin two or three samples of directions and memoranda: our remarks in brackets.

3 Vide page 170, on the orthography of this word.

MEMORANDA FOR PROOF-READERS.

The form is regular octavo.

Text is long primer, single leaded.

Tables and lists, having rules and boxheads, nonpareil solid.

Headings of tables and lists, brevier italic, lower case.

There are no numbered chapters. The heading of each section, which takes the place of chapter heading, is pica light-face celtic caps, spaced.

Geological ages and epochs are capitalized; for example, “Devonian,” “Trias,” “sub-Carboniferous” v. [page 176.]

Quoted extracts in regular text type (long primer), between quotation marks.

Capitalize “the West,” “the South,” etc., but not “western New York,” “central Pennsylvania,” etc.

Do not use “&c.” for “etc.”

“Prof.,” “Gen.,” etc., preceding initials or Christian name; “Professor,” “General,” etc., when last name alone is used; for example, “Prof. J. Smith,” “General Grant,” etc.

Full point after roman numerals.

“Saint Louis,” etc.; spell out “Saint.”

Names of periodicals, in italics.

Names of books, roman, in quotation marks.

“Panther creek”; but “Panther Creek district.” That is, capitalize titles. {p39}

The following sample relates to an octavo on Fishes:

Make “cod fishery” two words.

“Offshore,” “Inshore” [no hyphen].

“Sheepshead” [name of fish. Webster inserts an apostrophe and a hyphen,—“Sheep’s-head”].

“Herring fisheries” [no hyphen].

“Herring-nets” [insert hyphen].

From a quarto on Fishes:

“Cod-fisherman” [hyphen].

“Cod fishery” [two words].

Engineer work:

Make footnotes of the “Remarks” column.

For “D. D.” in copy, spell “dry-dock.”

Use figures in all cases, for weights, distances, etc.

The following was for a Digest—Decisions:

Spell “travelling,” “employee,” and divide “ser-vice.” [“Travelling” and “ser-vice” are Worcester style. Webster divides “serv-ice.”—In regard to “employee,” neither Webster nor Worcester gives it place; but, instead, the French “employé.” Webster has this note following the French word: “The English form of this word, viz., employee, though perfectly conformable to analogy, and therefore perfectly legitimate, is not sanctioned by the usage of good writers.” Since Webster’s note was written, some good writers, as in the book of Decisions above mentioned, have used the English word, as many printing-office employees can testify,—and “employé” may as well be sent home, according to the immigration laws, as unable to sustain itself in this country.[4]]

4 Since the above remark was written, we have found “employee” admitted as a correct English word, in Worcester’s “Supplement.”

Weather Reports:

The “upper Missouri valley” [small v].

The “Mississippi river” [small r].

Geological Survey:

The “Missouri Valley” [cap. V].

The “Missouri River” [cap. R].

The proof-reader knows, that (as we have already remarked) every printing-office has a style of its own; that, if left to itself, its style would be practically uniform and always respectable,—and he soon learns that some writers for the press have very firm opinions about matters of little or no consequence, and are very tenacious, if not pugnacious, in preferring tweedledee to tweedledum; not because it is written with more e’s, but because it is more correct—in their opinion. However great may be a reader’s capacity for memorizing trifling details, it is next to impossible to keep minute verbal differences on different mental shelves. After the big book is bound, one will be likely to find a mingling of styles; the big River of one page becomes a little river on the next; “Pittsburg” here, reads “Pittsburgh” there; and the dignified “National Park” of the first chapter will dwindle to a mere “national park” in chapter the twelfth.

If not hurried by a press of work, as may sometimes be the case, the reader will first glance at the proof as a whole. A variation in the thickness of the leads, or a wrong indention, will, in this tout-ensemble survey, very quickly catch his eye. Then, still supposing he has time, he will read the galley through silently, correcting errors in spelling; marking turned or inverted letters; improving the {p41} spacing, the punctuation; noting whether the heads and subheads are in the required type; whether the capitalization is uniform; whether—if the “slip” beneath his eye happen to be near the end of a large volume—the word “ourang-outang” which he now meets with, was not printed somewhere in the earlier part of the work as “orang-outang,” or, in fact, whether, after some questioning, it finally went to press as “orang-utan,”—which word he must now, to preserve uniformity, hunt for and find among his old proofs, if, peradventure, author or publisher, or other person, have not borrowed them “for a few minutes,”—alas! never to be returned.

Having settled this, and all similar cases and other doubtful matters, he hands the copy to an assistant, called a “copy-holder,” whose duty it is to read the copy aloud, while he himself keeps his eye on the print (but in newspaper offices, for the sake of greater celerity, the proof-reader often reads aloud, while the copy-holder follows him silently, intent on the copy: interrupting, however, whenever any discrepancy is observed). If the reader desire the copy-holder to pause while he makes a correction, he repeats the word where he wishes the reading to stop; when ready to proceed he again pronounces the same word, and the copy-holder reads on from that place.

The manner of marking, in the text, all errors noticed, is shown, infra, in the “Specimen of First Proof.” The corrections to be made are indicated, in the margin, by appropriate words or characters from “Marks used in correcting Proofs”—also {p42} inserted below. Writers for the press who themselves examine proof-sheets of their works, should familiarize themselves with proof-reading technics. An author who received for the first time some proof-sheets returned them “clean”—apparently having detected no errors. He was afterward disgusted on finding it necessary to print a leaf of “errata,” and complained that his corrections had been entirely disregarded. On re-examining the proofs he had returned, it was found that he had corrected—with knife as well as pen. Where a comma was wanting, he had used the pen, carefully and skillfully imitating the printed character; and to convert semicolons into commas he had brought the knife into play,—nicely scratching out the superfluous part of the point.

Sometimes a line, or it may be several lines, of type are by some mishap out of perpendicular—slanting; so that only one side of each letter-face shows a full impression on the proof. It is usual in such case to draw several slanting marks across the faulty line or lines, and make similar marks in the margin. It is quite common, also, for readers to insert in the margin the words “off its feet,”—that being the printing-office designation for sloping matter. One reader abandoned writing these words, for two reasons: the first, that a compositor, when correcting, inserted them in the text, making an astonishing sentence; the second, that the marked passage,—a piece of close, logical reasoning,—after being carefully scanned by the author, was brought to the reader, with a very earnest request that he would {p43} point out what justice there was in that bluff remark. It is enough to draw what beginners in writing call “straight marks” across the matter, and also in the margin. We append other—

MARKS USED IN CORRECTING PROOFS.

| Insert an em-quadrat.
| Dele, take out; expunge.
| Insert space.
| Less space.
| Close up entirely.
| Dele some type, and insert a space in lieu of what is removed.
| Dele some type, and close up.
| Broken or battered type.
| Plane down a letter. Push down a space or quadrat.
. . . . | Placed under erased words, restores them.
| Written in the margin, restores a canceled word or passage, or such portions of erased text as have dots under them.
| Begin paragraph.
| Remove to left.
| Remove to right.
| Carry higher up on page.
| Carry down.
| Four lines subscript, denote italic capitals.
| Three lines subscript, denote capitals.
| Two lines subscript, denote small capitals.
| One line subscript, denotes italics.
| Wrong font.
| Transpose.
| Period.
| Colon.
| Apostrophe.
=/ | Hyphen.
–/ | En-dash.
|—| | Em-dash.

If there is an omission (an “out”) make a caret at the place of the out, and if the out is short, write the omitted word or words in margin; if long, write in margin “out—see copy,” and pin to the proof the sheet of copy containing the omitted portion.

| Lower-case.
| Small capitals.
or or | calls attention to some doubtful word or sentence.

Several other marks are used, which need no explanation.

In order to show our readers the practical application of the above marks, we will suppose the following paragraph from Guizot to be put in type abounding in errors, and will then exhibit the corrections as made by the proof-reader:

SPECIMEN OF FIRST PROOF.

The above is very bad, even for a first proof,—but we have seen worse, and have, perhaps, ourself been responsible for some not much better. While the copy-holder is reading aloud the copy from which {p45} the above was set up, the reader is busy marking errors, and making such characters in the margin as will inform the compositors what is to be done to make their work correct. At the conclusion of the reading, the proof will present an appearance somewhat like this corrected—

SPECIMEN OF FIRST PROOF.

If the proof in hand be a reprint, and the new edition is to conform to the old, the copy-holder, while reading, pronounces aloud the points, capitals, etc., {p46} as they occur in the copy—saving labor and time by using well-understood abbreviations. Take, for instance, the second stanza of Tennyson’s “Voyage”:

“Warm broke the breeze against the brow,
Dry sang the tackle, sang the sail:
The Lady’s-head upon the prow
Caught the shrill salt, and sheer’d the gale.
The broad seas swell’d to meet the keel,
And swept behind: so quick the run,
We felt the good ship shake and reel,
We seem’d to sail into the Sun!”

This stanza the copy-holder reads thus:

Quote “Warm broke the breeze against the brow, (com.)

Dry sang the tackle, (com.) sang the sail: (colon.)

The Lady’s-(cap. pos. s, hyphen.)head upon the prow

Caught the shrill salt, (com.) and sheer’(pos.)d the gale. (full point.)

The broad seas swell’(pos.)d to meet the keel, (com.)

And swept behind: (colon.) so quick the run, (com.)

We felt the good ship shake and reel, (com.)

We seem’(pos.)d to sail into the Sun!” (cap. exclam. close of quote.)

If the work extend beyond a single galley, the slips of proof are marked in regular sequence, A, B, C, etc., or 1, 2, 3, etc. Each slip is marked at top “First Proof”: the names of the compositors, which have been inscribed on their “takes,” are duly transferred to the printed proof, which, with the errors plainly noted thereon, is then given for correction to the same persons who set up the matter. Their duty having been attended to, a “second proof” is taken: {p47} this the reader compares carefully with the first, to ascertain whether the requisite changes of type have been properly made; whether “doublets” have been taken out, and “outs” put in. If any mark has escaped the notice of the compositors, it is transferred to the second proof. Close attention should be given to this process of “revising”; it is not enough to see that a wrong letter has been taken out, and a right one put in; in the line where a change has been made, all the words should be compared, and also the line above and the line below a correction,—since in correcting an error among movable types, some of the types may move when they ought not, and get misplaced.

As what escapes the notice of one observer may be perceived by another, this second proof is again “read by copy” by another proof-reader and assistant, and a second time corrected and revised. The “third proof” is now sent to the author, editor, or publisher, with so much copy as may cover it, the copy-holder being careful, however, to retain the “mark-off”; i. e., the sheet on which is marked off the place where the next “first proof” is to begin. But when the work is of such sort as not to require extraordinary care, the second proof is sent out, a single reading by copy being deemed sufficient. If the work is read twice by copy, only one reader should attend to the punctuation.

If, now, the copy have been hastily or carelessly prepared, or if the author have gained new light since he prepared it, the outside party having charge {p48} of the work (whom, for convenience, we will designate as the “author”) will return his proofs, full of erasures, additions, alterations, interlineations, and transpositions. With these the original compositors have no concern; the changes required are made by “the office,” and the time is charged to the person who contracted for the printing of the work.

A second, third, or even more consecutive revises of the same slip are sometimes sent to the author, to the intent that he may see for himself that his corrections have been duly made, and to allow him further opportunity to introduce such alterations as to him may seem desirable. Usually, however, the work, after the correction of the author’s first proof, is made up into pages; and when there are enough of these for a “signature” or form of octavo, duodecimo, or whatever the number of pages on the sheet may be, the proof-reader revises these pages by the author’s latest returned proof, cuts off the slip at the line where the last page ends, and sends the folded leaves, labeled “Second,” “Third,” or “Fourth” proof, as the case may be, together with the corresponding slips of the next previous proof, to the author, as before. The portion of slip proof remaining—termed the “make-up”—should be inscribed with the proper page, and the letter or figure which is to be the signature of the next sheet, and given, for his guidance, to the person who makes up the work; to be returned again to the proof-reader, with the other slip proofs of the next sheet of made-up pages, when that is ready for revision. {p49}

The author may be desirous of seeing a fifth, sixth, or, as the algebraists say, any number, n, of proofs. When he expresses himself as satisfied with his share of the correcting, the last author’s proof is corrected, a “revise” taken, and the proof-reader gives this last revise a final reading for the press. As any errors which escape detection now, will show themselves in the book, this last reading should be careful, deliberate, and painstaking. See to it, my young beginner, that the “signature” is the letter or number next in sequence to that on your previous press-proof. See to it, that the first page of the sheet in hand connects in reading with the last page of the previous one, and that the figures denoting the page form the next cardinal number to that which you last sent to press. Having done this, examine the “folios” (the “pagination,” as some say) throughout; read the running titles; if there be a new chapter commenced, look back in your previous proofs to make sure that said new chapter is “XIX.,” and not “XVIII.”; see that the head-lines of the chapter are of the right size, and in the right font of type; for, if the “minion” case happened to be covered up, the compositor may have forgotten himself, and set them up in “brevier”; if there is rule-work, see that the rules come together properly, and are right side up; if there is Federal money, see that the “$” is put at the beginning of the number following a rule,[5] and of the number in the top line of every page; if points are {p50} used as “leaders,” see that there are no commas or hyphens among them. If the style require a comma before leaders, see that none have been left out; if the style reject a comma, see that none have been left in; in short, see to everything,—and then, on the corner of the sheet, write the word “Press” as boldly as you can, but with the moral certainty that some skulking blunder of author, compositor, or corrector has eluded all your watchfulness.

5 In the Government Printing Office the style omits the “$” in this case,—the sign at top of table or page being considered sufficient.

The errors made by ourselves are those which occasion us the most pain. Therefore be chary of changing anything in the author’s last proof. If a sentence seem obscure, see whether the insertion of a comma will make it clear. If you find “patonce,” do not change it to “potence,” unless, from your knowledge of heraldry, you are aware of a good reason for such an alteration. If you find pro. ami, look in the dictionary before striking out the point after pro.; peradventure it is a contraction. If, finally, after puzzling over some intricate sentence, you can make nothing of it, let it console you that the following paragraph appears in Hävernick: “Accordingly it is only from this passage that a conclusion can be drawn as to the historical condition of the people, which is confirmed also by notices elsewhere”; and let it content you to say, in the words of Colenso, “I am at a loss to understand the meaning of the above paragraph.” So let the obscure passage remain.

Still, however, should you find some gross error of dates, some obvious solecism, or some wrong footing {p51} in a column of figures, and find yourself unable to change the reading with absolute certainty of being right, this proof, which you had hoped would be a final one, must be returned to the author with the proper quære. When it comes back to your sanctum, you may perhaps be pleased at finding on the margin a few words complimentary of your carefulness; or perhaps a question couched in this encomiastic style: “Why did not your stupid proof-reader find this out before?”

Whether reading first or final proofs of Records of Court, you should not change the spelling of words, nor supply omissions, nor strike out a repeated word or words; for the printed record is assumed to be an exact transcript of what is written, and there should be no alterations,—neither uniformity nor correctness is to be sought at the expense of departing from copy. Inserting the necessary points where these have been neglected, is not considered a change of the record,—as, for instance, an interrogation point after a direct question to a witness; for, as “the punctuation is no part of the law,” a fortiori it is no part of the record. If the caption be “Deposition of John Prat,” and the signature be “John Pratt,” and if in another place you find the same individual designated as “John Pradt,” there is no help for it. You have no authority to alter the record, and must print it as it stands. So, too, in regard to dates. If you read “1st Feb. 1889” on one page, “Feb. 1, 1889” on another, so let them stand—the change of style is a trifle; and, if it be a fault, it is the fault of the record, and not yours. {p52}

And here let us say a word about this matter of uniformity: very important in some works, in others it is of no consequence whatever, however much some readers may stickle for it. If, for example, a mass of letters, from all parts of the country, recommending a patent inkstand, or stating the prospects of the potato crop, are sent in to be printed, the dates and addresses will vary in style, according to the taste and knowledge of the several writers; and there is not the slightest need of changing them to make them alike, as if all these widely scattered writers had graduated from the same school. Let such writings be printed as diversely as they come to hand. If one writes plough, and another plow, what matters it, so far as your proof-reading is concerned? If one writes “15th June,” and another “June 15” or “June 15th,” so let it stand on the printed page. It is idle to waste time in making things alike, that could not by any possibility have been written alike. But you can make each letter consistent with itself, which is all that uniformity requires. You need not stretch one man out, and cut off the feet of another, to justify all authors in your composing-stick. So much for exceptional cases.

As a general rule, study to preserve uniformity in every work. If “A. M.” and “P. M.” are in capitals on one page, it will look very like carelessness to have them appear “A.M.” and “P.M.” in small capitals, on the next. With the exceptions above pointed out, your only safety is to have but one style, and to adhere to it with the stiffness of a martinet, {p53} in all contingencies, unless overruled by those who have a right to dictate in the premises.

READING GREEK.

Greek words sometimes appear in copy, and are somewhat vexatious to printers who never had the good fortune to study Greek at school—or elsewhere. In a proof-sheet, we once met a word whose etymology was given thus in the copy: “From Ἕλιος the sun, and φιλος a lover” (the epsilon was the author’s mistake). The compositor, not aware of a Greek alphabet, set up the passage in those English letters which most nearly resemble the Hellenic characters, and it appeared in this guise: “From Ediog the sun, and pidog a lover.” We advise proof-readers, and compositors and copy-holders as well, to acquire—if they do not already possess—so much knowledge of Greek letters and characters as will enable them to acquit themselves without discredit, though “Ediog” and “pidog” condog (v. Wb.) to annoy them. A few hours’ attention to the alphabet and characters given below, and to the annexed practical directions, will suffice to fix in the memory as much knowledge of Greek as will serve for the mechanical following of the copy,—mechanical following,—for, if you are setting up or reading a reprint of the 450th page of Webster’s Dictionary, and meet with the word ἐννενήκοντα you must put in the eleven letters as they stand: and if copying Worcester’s 486th page, you find ἐννεήκοντα, put in {p54} the ten letters. If you have any doubts, submit your query.

The Greek alphabet consists of twenty-four letters.

Alpha | Α α | a
Beta | Β β | b
Gamma | Γ γ | g
Delta | Δ δ | d
Epsilon | Ε ε | ĕ
Zeta | Ζ ζ | z
Eta | Η η | ē
Theta | Θ ϑ θ | th
Iota | Ι ι | i
Kappa | Κ κ | k
Lambda | Λ λ | l
Mu | Μ μ | m
Nu | Ν ν | n
Xi | Ξ ξ | x
Omicron | Ο ο | ŏ
Pi | Π π | p
Rho | Ρ ϱ ρ | r
Sigma | Σ σ, final ς | s
Tau | Τ τ | t
Upsilon | Υ υ | u
Phi | Φ φ | ph
Chi | Χ χ | ch
Psi | Ψ ψ | ps
Omega | Ω ω | ō

In reading Greek, mention each letter by its English equivalent.

Ε is read, “cap. short e”; ε, “short e”; Η is read, “cap. long e”; η, “long e.”

Ο is read, “cap. short o”; ο, “short o”; Ω is read, “cap. long o”; ω, “long o.” {p55}

There are three accents,—the acute ( ΄ ), the grave (  ), and the circumflex (  ).

ύ is read, “acute u”; ὶ is read, “grave i”; ᾶ is read, “circumflex a.”

Over every vowel or diphthong beginning a word is placed one of two characters, called breathings, which, for the purpose of reading, we may designate as the smooth ( ᾿ ) and the rough ( ῾ ).

ἀ is read, “smooth a”; ἱ is read, “rough i.”

When two marks appear over a letter, both should be mentioned by the copy-holder.

ὔ is read, “smooth, acute u”; ὅ is read, “rough, acute, short o”; ὃ, “rough, grave, short o”; ὦ, “circumflex, smooth, long o.”

The compositor and proof-reader should be careful that accented letters are used according to the copy, as in many cases the difference of accentuation serves also to mark the difference of signification. Thus, νέος signifies new; νεὸς, a field: ἴον, a violet; ἰὸν, going.

ᾳ, ῃ, ῳ, are diphthongs; their second vowel (ι), being silent, is placed underneath, or subscribed. These should be read thus: ᾳ, “a, subscript”; ῃ, “long e, subscript”; ῳ, “long o, subscript.”

In Greek, only four points or stops are used: the comma (,); the note of interrogation (;); the colon, or point at top (·); and the full stop (.). These should be mentioned as they occur. {p56}

EXAMPLE FOR READING.

EPIGRAM ON THEMISTOCLES.

Αντὶ τάφου λιτοῖο θὲς Ἑλλάδα, θὲς δ’ ὲπι ταύταν

Δούρατα, βαρβαρικᾶς σύμβολα ναυφθορίας,
Καὶ τύμβῳ κρηπῖδα περίγραφε Περσικὸν Ἄρη
Καὶ Ξέρξην· τούτοις θάπτε Θεμιστοκλέα.
Στάλα δ’ ἁ Σαλαμὶς ἐπικείσεται, ἔργα λέγουσα
Τἀμά· τί με σμὶκροῖς τὸν μέγαν ἐντίτθετε;

The method of reading will, we think, be sufficiently exemplified if we give but one line. We select the third, which should be read by the copy-holder, as follows:

Cap. K, a, grave i; t, acute u, m, b, long o subscript; k, r, long e, p, circumflex i, d, a; p, short e, r, acute i, g, r, a, ph, short e; cap. P, short e, r, s, i, k, grave short o, n; cap. smooth acute A, r, long e.

Words from dead and foreign languages, introduced into English text, are printed in italics, until, being frequently met, they cease to be strangers; then printers and proof-readers anglicify them as much as possible, by printing them in roman; but some of these retain certain accents which indicate their alien origin. The Spanish cañon is completely anglicized into “canyon” (o as in no); our miners write “arrastra” in roman, although the term has not yet found its way into our most popular dictionaries; our dreadful accident-makers have set afloat so many “canards,” that that word has become better English than French; “papier-mache” usually appears in roman without the accent on the final e; employé {p57} has become a good “employee” in our workshops; and at an early day, every “protégé” and “protégée,” already roman, will throw off the foreign accents, and remain none the less acute “protegees”; “éclat,” “régime,” and “résumé” still cling to their acute e’s. Many words and phrases are hesitating whether to remain foreigners, or to become naturalized. They have “taken out their first papers,” as it were, having at times appeared in English garb.

It would be vastly convenient for every compositor and proof-reader (every author, of course, reads proof) to have at hand two lists of such Latin and foreign words as most frequently occur in books, magazines, and newspapers,—the one containing the words to be set up in italics, the other, words to “go in roman,” as the phrase is. We append two such lists, as samples rather than as fixities to be followed, although they represent very nearly, if not exactly, the present status of the class of words we are considering. The roman list is destined to be continually lengthening, while the italic, save as it receives new accretions from foreign sources, must be correspondingly diminishing.

- WORDS TO GO IN ITALICS.

- ante
- ad captandum
- ad libitum
- ad quod damnum
- aliunde
- alma mater
- amende honorable
- amicus curiæ
- artiste
- avant coureur
- beau monde
- coram non judice
- corpus delicti
- coup d’état
- coup de grâce
- coup de main
- de bonis non
- de facto
- de jure
- del credere
- de novo
- dilettante
- dilettanti
- dramatis personæ {p58}
- duces tecum
- en route
- entrée
- et al.
- ex officio
- ex parte
- ex post facto
- ex rel.
- falsi crimen
- feme covert
- feme sole
- femme couverte
- femme sole
- fleur de lis
- functus officio
- garçon
- ignes fatui
- ignis fatuus
- in extenso
- infra
- in statu quo
- inter alia
- in toto
- in transitu
- juste milieu
- malum in se
- malum prohibitum
- matériel
- nem. con.
- n’importe
- non constat
- non obstante
- nous verrons
- passim
- peculium
- personnel
- postea
- postliminium
- post mortem
- prima facie
- procès-verbal
- pro forma
- projet
- pro tempore
- rationale
- res adjudicata
- sans-culotte
- sine die
- soi disant
- sotto voce
- sub judice
- supra
- tabula rasa
- terra incognita
- tout ensemble
- ultima ratio
- ultima Thule
- vide
- vice versa
- viva voce
- vraisemblance

- WORDS TO GO IN ROMAN.

- addenda
- addendum
- ad interim
- ad valorem
- alias
- alibi
- alumnus
- alumnæ
- alumni
- animus
- assumpsit
- bagatelle
- belles-lettres
- bijou
- billet-doux
- bivouac
- bizarre
- bona fide
- canaille
- canard
- capias
- chargé d’ affaires
- coterie
- crevasse
- data
- datum
- débris
- dedimus
- détour
- devoir
- diluvion
- diluvium
- éclat
- emeute
- ennui
- entrepot
- exequatur
- exuviæ
- fasces
- faubourg
- feuilleton
- fiacre
- fieri facias
- habeas corpus
- hacienda
- hauteur
- in banc
- in situ
- literati
- literatim
- Magna Charta
- mandamus
- menu
- mittimus
- nisi prius
- nolle prosequi
- oyer and terminer
- papier-mache
- per capita
- per diem
- posse comitatus
- pro rata
- protégé
- quasi
- régime
- résumé
- rôle
- savant
- seriatim
- sobriquet
- status
- supersedeas
- via
- venire
- venire facias
- verbatim

CHAPTER III. STYLE.

Before beginning to read proof, a man usually prepares himself by learning how to make the technical marks used in correcting; he then reads a chapter on the use of capitals; takes up a grammar, and reviews the rules of punctuation; and by reading, and conversing with readers, gets such helps as give him a good degree of confidence. But at the very threshold of his duties he is met by a little “dwarfish demon” called “Style,” who addresses him somewhat after this fashion: “As you see me now, so I have appeared ever since the first type was set in this office. Everything here must be done as I say. You may mark as you please, but don’t violate the commands of Style. I may seem to disappear for a time, when there is a great rush of work, and you may perhaps bring yourself to believe that Style is dead. But do not deceive yourself,—Style never dies. When everything is going merrily, and you are rejoicing at carrying out some pet plan of your own, you will find me back again, tearing the forms to pieces, and again asserting my irrevocable authority. Stick to my orders, and all will be well. Don’t tell me of grammarians or lexicographers; say nothing of better ways, or improvements or {p60} progress. I am Style, and my laws are like those of the Medes and Persians.” And Style states his true character.

Unfortunately for the proof-reader, Style seldom writes his laws; or, if at any time written, their visible form presently perishes, and they can only be got at, as one may learn the common law of England, through past decisions. You, my young friend, may in vain consult old proofs; works formerly read, at the desk you now occupy, by some vanished predecessor. Your searching cannot help you much; for authors being without the jurisdiction, are independent of the authority, of Style,—they may allow him to dominate over their works, or they may not. How, then, are you to distinguish, and select as models, those which were read under the direct supervision of Style? In the course of a few years you may come to know a portion of his laws; but the whole code is past finding out.

To drop the personification, every office has a style—an arrangement of details—peculiar to itself. In one, “Government” is spelled with a capital; in a second, “government” is spelled with a lower-case “g”; in this office, the four seasons are always “Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter”; in that, they are “spring, summer,” etc., having capitals only when personified: and so of a thousand other cases in capitalization. In this office, before a quoted extract we put a colon and dash, thus:—while, in the office across the way, the style is to put a colon only: and, a little farther on, is an office which uses {p61} only the dash—yet a fourth, round the corner, puts a comma and dash, thus,—while a fifth undertakes to use all these and even additional methods, as the period, the semicolon, and dash, selecting as the sense or convenience or caprice may dictate.[6] Here, the style requires a comma before and, in “pounds, shillings, and pence”; there, the style is “pounds, shillings and pence.” “Viz,” in Mr. A.’s office, is considered a contraction, and is printed “viz.”—with the period; in Mr. B.’s office, it is not a contraction, and the period is not used; in Mr. C.’s office, “viz” is put entirely under the ban, and compositors and proof-readers are directed to substitute for it the word “namely,” in all cases. As regards orthography, two styles—the Worcester and Webster—have, in almost all offices, alternate sway; and—which complicates matters still more—everywhere there is an “office style.” Each “rules a moment; chaos umpire sits,” etc.

6 For some varieties of style in introducing quotations, see “Historical Memorials of Westminster Abbey. By Arthur Penrhyn Stanley, D.D. London: John Murray, 1868”; especially pp. 256, 257.

Suppose half-a-dozen works going through the press at the same time, embracing three styles of orthography, and four or five styles in capitalization; one style which requires turned commas at the beginning only, of a quotation, and one which requires them at the beginning of every line of an extract,—you see at once that a proof-reader, so beset, must needs have his wits about him. For, notice, the first “slip” which comes to hand is in the “Life of {p62} John Smith”; this is in the Worcester style, and requires “traveller” and “jeweller” to be spelled each with two l’s, and “impanelled” with two l’s. The next galley-proof to be read is part of the “Life of James Smith”; this is in the Webster style; and now the reader must change front, and see to it that he spells “traveler” and “jeweler” with one l each, and “impaneled” with one l. Now as these works are in the same size of type, and are very similar in appearance, it would not be strange if now and then the styles were to “cross over”; but, observe, the third slip, the “Life of William Smith,” is “office style,” requiring “traveler” to be spelled with one l, and “jeweller” with two (very absurd, but all styles have something absurd and arbitrary in them), while “empanel” now repudiates an initial i. Further, the publishers of the “Life of John” desire to have it in uniform style with their “watch-pocket series,” in which names of ships were put between quotation-marks; the author of the “Life of James” insists, that, in his work, names of ships shall not be quoted, and shall be set in roman; the “Life of William,” being in office style, requires names of ships to be in italics.

Again, each of these works has, at the commencement of its several chapters, a cast of initial letter differing from the style of the other two,—the first a two-line plain letter, the second a black letter, the third an open-face letter; and still further (there is no “finally”), the “Life of John” has “backwards,” “forwards,” “towards,” all with the final s; and the proof-reader has just received from the outside reader {p63} of the “Life of James,” a sharp note, stating that he has stricken the s from “towards,” as many as ten times, and coolly assuring the said proof-reader that there is no such word as “towards” in the English language. Meanwhile, intermingled with the above readings, are four Sunday-school books, A, B, C, and D. A and B require the words “everything,” “anything,” and “cannot” to be divided respectively into two words,—“every thing,” “any thing,” “can not”; while C and D, with a general direction to follow Webster, want these words printed in the usual manner,—closed up. A and C must have two words of “ ’t is,” “it ’s,” “do n’t,” “could n’t,” “must n’t”; B and D require the same, with the exception of “don’t,” which must be made one word. A and D want an apostrophe in “won’t”; while B and C insist that the change from “will not” is so great, that “wont” is virtually a new word, wherefore they cannot conscientiously permit the apostrophe.

Among these literary foolishnesses and idle discriminations, are inter-readings of pamphlets on the leather trade; the Swamptown Directory, the copy being the pages of an old edition, pasted on broadsides of paper, half the names stricken out, and new ones inserted haphazard on the wide margin, their places in the text indicated by lines crossing and recrossing each other, and occasionally lost in a plexus or ganglion; reports of the Panjandrum Grand Slump Mining Company, the Glenmutchkin Railway Company, and the new and improved Brown Paper {p64} Roofing Company; Proceedings of the National Wool-Pulling Association, and of the Society for promoting the Introduction of Water-Gas for Culinary and Illuminating Purposes; likewise auction-bills, calendars, ball-cards, dunning-letters (some of these to be returned through the post-office, the proof-reader’s own feathers winging the shaft), glowing descriptions of Dyes, Blackings, Polishes, and Varnishes; in short, proofs of the endless variety of matters which constitute the daily pabulum of a book and job office,—and, in all these, style has its requirements.

If all this be borne in mind, it will not seem surprising, especially when we reflect that all individuals in their progress toward a perfect civilization are not yet within sight of their goal,—it will not seem surprising, if now and then an irate brother should rush into the proof-reader’s presence, exclaiming, “What do you mean, sir? I thought I knew something, but it appears I don’t! Here you have put ‘Hudson street’ with a little s, and ‘Hudson River’ with a capital R: what sort of work do you call that?” Should this occur, the schooled reader has but to reply, “That, my dear sir, is the uniform style of this office,—we always ‘put things’ as you have stated,” and the questioner is satisfied, and apologetically withdraws.

As no acknowledged literary Dictator has arisen since Johnson (if we except Webster), and as we have no good grounds to expect one, let us hope there may be a convention of the learned men of the United States, with full powers to legislate upon, and {p65} finally settle, all questions of syntax, orthography, punctuation, and style, and authorized to punish literary dissenters, by banishment from the Republic of Letters.

Were there a common and acknowledged authority to which printer, publisher, proof-reader, and author could appeal, the eye, the pen, and the press would be relieved of much useless labor, and the cost of books would be correspondingly reduced. The Smithsonian Institution would confer a lasting benefit on mankind by establishing a Board or Bureau of scholars, which should publish a dictionary of all English and Anglicized words, without various spellings, and also such other words as might meet the want long felt, and which was expressed in “The Spectator,” so long ago as Aug. 4, 1711,—where the author, having spoken of certain perplexities which beset writers, adds: “[These] will never be decided till we have something like an academy, that by the best authorities and rules drawn from the analogy of languages, shall settle all controversies between grammar and idiom.” When such works from the Smithsonian Institution shall have appeared, and Congress shall have adopted them as standards to which all Departmental work shall conform, the diversities of spelling will disappear from the publications of the Government. Those who would diffuse knowledge among men should have sharp oversight of the vehicle in which knowledge is to be conveyed,—to wit, LANGUAGE,—“the foundation for the whole faculty of thinking.”

CHAPTER IV. GENERAL REMARKS: CONTAINING SOME ILLUSTRATIONS OF, AND ADDITIONS TO, THE SUBJECT-MATTER OF THE FOREGOING THREE CHAPTERS.

If an author sends his manuscript to the printing-office without any instructions or directions as to capitalization, punctuation, etc., the printer will follow his own “office style,” and the work will be, within certain limits, correctly done; that is, with as near an approach to uniformity as it is possible for ordinary fallible mortals to attain. But if the manuscript be accompanied with numerous “Directions” to the printer, some of these will be forgotten or overlooked, or become mixed in the minds of compositors and proof-readers with some set of diametrically opposite “Directions,”—and so the work will very likely abound in incongruities.

We have known two works to be in hand at the same time, one with directions to “Capitalize freely,” the other, to “Use capitals sparingly.” The “Directions” are sometimes quite minute, almost microscopic; still, it is the duty of the proof-reader to follow them into the very extremities of their littleness. One writer says, “Put up ‘eastern,’ ‘western,’ etc., in such cases as this: ‘The purple finch sometimes passes the cold season in Eastern {p67} Massachusetts, and even in Northern New Hampshire’”; another directs, “Put compass-points down, as ‘In northern Nevada.’” If the office style is “Hudson and Connecticut Rivers,” a direction will be sent in thus: “In all my work, print ‘Weber and Sevier rivers,’ ‘Phalan’s and Johanna lakes’—not Lakes.” One author wants “VIII-inch gun and 64-pounder”; another looks upon this as numerically and typographically erroneous, and insists on an “8-inch gun and a LXIV-pounder”; still another prefers arabic figures throughout, and prints an “8-inch gun and 64-pounder”; yet another likes best the first of the above styles, but wishes a period placed after the roman numerals, so it shall read, an “VIII.-inch gun”; one more dislikes “double pointing,” and would retain the period, but strike out the hyphen. “In my novel, spell ‘Marquise De Gabriac’ with a big D, and ‘Madame de Sparre’ with a little ‘d.’”

With hundreds of Reports and reports from Institutions and institutions, from Departments and departments, from Bureaus and bureaus, trials at law, equity cases, interference cases, Revised Statutes, and thousands of documents, all as anxious to attract the public eye as ever Mr. Riddleberger was to catch the Speaker’s, and rushing compositors and proof-readers and steam-presses with a dizzying velocity which almost prohibits nicety of execution, it were far wiser for authors and copyists to attend carefully to the legibility and accuracy of their manuscripts, than to send to the printer blundering haphazard pages, accompanied with directions running counter {p68} to what the writers themselves have exhibited in their manuscripts.

We recollect that a printer once received a manuscript accompanied with minute directions, extending even to syllabication. It was given out to the compositors, and a rough manuscript it was; one found in his take, “One Spanish Mc Krel” and “One caperamber,”—as he and the others in his chapel read the words,—conundrums which after hard study of characteristics and comparison of letters were, by an ingenious old typographic Champollion, solved as “One Spanish mackerel” and “One café-au-lait.”

If Gunther’s “Catalogue of Fishes, British Museum” is to be written, it is proper to abbreviate it to “Gunther’s Cat. Fish., Brit. Mus.” An author who undertook so to write it, jammed the Cat. close to the Fish, and placed the first period above the line. He should not have been surprised when he read in his proof-sheet, “Gunther’s Cat-Fish., Brit. Mus.”,—which, although apparently according to copy, was not “according to Gunther.”

The use of commas and other pause-marks is to bring out the sense, and when capitals will subserve the same purpose it is well to use them also,—whether one finds a printed Rule directing it or not. Thus Stedman writes:

“In his verse, Emerson’s spiritual philosophy and laws of conduct appear again, but transfigured. Always the idea of Soul, central and pervading, of which Nature’s forms are but the created symbols. As in his early discourse he recognized {p69} two entities, Nature and the Soul, so to the last he believed Art to be simply the union of Nature with man’s will—Thought symbolizing itself by Nature’s aid.”

Names of States and Territories, when following names of cities, towns, and post-offices, are usually contracted; as:

Savannah, Ga.; Brunswick, Me.; San Diego, Cal.; New Orleans, La.; Plymouth, Mass.

But in any other connection, names of States and Territories are spelled in full; as:

Mendocino County, California. We crossed Nevada Territory. We visited Luray Cave, Virginia.

In an office where the employees are accustomed to the above rules, absolute uniformity would be attainable, if it were not for the interference of specialists. If, from such office, a book is issued in which you find “Richmond, Virginia,” and, farther on, “Richmond, Va.,” you may be sure that a “direction” to “spell out, in all cases, names of States and Territories” accompanied the manuscript; that one reader, mindful, as it happened, of the important direction, spelled “Virginia,” while another, from force of habit, followed the office style, and made no change from the customary “Va.”; and you may further conclude, that the author of the work, when examining the proof-sheets, had himself become oblivious of the direction he had given.

We have known more than forty special directions {p70} to be sent to a printing-office with the manuscript copy of one book. An author may fancy that numerous minute rulings will ensure uniformity and beauty to his book; but the chances of discrepancy and mistake are increased in direct ratio to the number of such of his rulings as run counter to the office style. His “more requires less,” but produces “more.”

CHAPTER V. PUNCTUATION.

Printers and proof-readers are to take for granted, that, in every work which falls under their supervision, the proper agreement between thought and expression has been effected by the author. He alone has the right to change the words and their collocation; and, if fairly punctuated, the manuscript should be closely followed, word for word, and point for point.

Every person who writes for the press should punctuate his work presentably; but—since the majority of writers are inattentive to punctuation—custom and convenience, if not necessity, have thrown upon the compositor and proof-reader the task of inserting in their proper places the grammatical points, and such other points and marks as shall assist a reader in obtaining a ready apprehension of the author’s meaning. These are the period (.), the colon (:), the semicolon (;), the comma (,), the note of interrogation (?), the note of exclamation (!), the parenthesis ( ), and the dash (—).

Besides these principal characters, there are other marks and signs used in writing and printing,—the hyphen (‐), the apostrophe (’), and others; all which may be found in the concluding division of {p72} this chapter, numbered VIII., and should be referred to as occasion may require.

Books which treat of English grammar speak of four of the points in common use—to wit, the period, the colon, the semicolon, and the comma—as “grammatical” points; while the dash, the note of interrogation, the note of exclamation, and the parenthesis are classified as “rhetorical,”—being used to indicate various effects produced in conversation by changes in the tone of the voice. But as “English grammar is the art of speaking and writing [or printing] the English language with propriety,” and as all points and marks in the printer’s case are necessary to printing with propriety, it is not essential in this work to make the distinctions alluded to above. Nor shall we treat at length, if at all, of technical marks not in common use; as, for instance, signs used in algebra and chemistry, and in various arts and sciences. These can be referred to, should occasion require, in handbooks, and in Webster’s Dictionary, pp. 1864–68, or in Worcester’s, pp. 1773–75.

Our school-books used to tell us, that at the period we should stop long enough to count four; at the colon, three; at the semicolon, two; at the comma, one. But pauses vary in length, as readers and speakers wish to affect or impress their hearers: hence reporters of speeches and orations sometimes—finding ordinary points and marks insufficient—insert, in brackets, some comment indicating that there was a pause made which outreached the time {p73} allowed for an ordinary period. We listened in April, 1861, to a speech by Wendell Phillips, in which, at the close of one sentence, the orator paused long enough to count ten or twelve; the reporters at that place inserted in brackets the words “[An impressive pause].”[7] To denote by distinctive characters every possible length of pause would require an infinitude of signs, types, and cases. We must therefore do the best we can with the few points now in use, leaving much to the taste of authors, printers, and readers. Still, the immense advantage modern students have over those of ancient times is made obvious by a comparison of antique and modern writings,—for punctuation is comparatively a modern affair, whose origin and changes it will be both useful and interesting to trace,—and in doing this, we shall endeavor to avoid the charge of prolixity, by condensing into brief space information gained from a variety of sources.

7 “There is only one thing those cannon shot in the harbor of Charleston settle,—that there never can be a compromise. . . . During these long and weary weeks we have waited to hear the Northern conscience assert its purpose. It comes at last. [An impressive pause.] Massachusetts blood has consecrated the pavements of Baltimore, and those stones are now too sacred to be trodden by slaves.”

The most ancient Greek manuscript known is among the papyri of the Louvre. It is a work on astronomy, and is indorsed with deeds of 165 and 164 B.C. This has “a certain sort of separation of words.” In a copy of Homer, written B.C., a wedge-shaped sign > is inserted “between the beginnings of {p74} lines” to mark a new passage. But even these marks were soon lost sight of; subsequent Greek and Latin writing runs on continuously without distinction of words. In the fifth century of our era, the fourth verse of the Second Epistle of John was thus written:

τεκνωνσουπεριπατουν
τασεναληθειακαθωσεντο
ληνελαβομεναποτουπρς (The πρς a contraction for πατρος.)

In Greek MSS. this method continued until the fourteenth century.

HOWTHEANCIENTSREADTHEIRWORKSWRITTENIN

THISMANNERITISNOTEASYTOCONCEIVE

St. Jerome (A.D. 324–420) wrote a Latin version of the Bible—“the foundation of the Vulgate”—“per cola et commata”; not with colons and commas as we understand those words, but by a stichometric arrangement,—dividing the text into short sentences or lines, according to the sense, chiefly with a view to a better understanding of the meaning, and a better delivery in public reading. It is not until the latter part of the seventh century that there is some separation of words in Latin MSS. In the later Latin (eighth century) the full point in various positions was introduced,—being placed on a level with the top, bottom, or middle of the letters,—as the students of “Andrews and Stoddard” are well aware. In still later MSS. in small letter, the full point on the line or high was first used; then the comma and {p75} semicolon; and the inverted semicolon (), whose power was stronger than the comma.

In early Irish and English MSS., separation of words is quite consistently followed; and in these the common mark of punctuation was the full point, while to denote the final stop or period one or two points with a comma (..,) were used.

Contractions were much used in ancient MSS. to save time and labor. Some of these were denoted by a semicolon ; as b; = bus; q; = que; vi; = videlicet,—this character, in cursive writing, readily became a z, whence we have our viz = videlicet.

The Roman numerals in ancient texts were placed between full points; e.g., .CXL., to prevent confusion.

Punctuation remained very uncertain until the end of the fifteenth century, when the Manutii, three generations of printers,—the elder (1450–1515) the most learned, skillful, and energetic of the three,—increased the number of points, and made rules for their application; and these were so generally adopted, that Aldus Manutius and his son and grandson may be considered inventors of the present system of punctuation, notwithstanding it has been changed, and perhaps improved upon, since their time,—notably in the use of the colon. But scholars differ so widely in some respects as to the insertion of commas, as well as other points, that not many rules are as yet absolutely fixed.

Modern writers tell us that “points are used to mark the sense rather than the pauses.” We would {p76} substitute “as well as” for “rather.” In writing from dictation we place points where the dictator makes pauses; and in reading we make pauses where the writer has put the points. For example, note the difference in sense and pause, according as the comma is placed before or after “to the end,” in the following sentence:

I have advised the Attorney-General to read this letter to the end, that he may see precisely how this matter will affect public interest.

I have advised the Attorney-General to read this letter, to the end that he may see precisely how this matter will affect public interest.

Murray’s large octavo English Grammar and countless common-school grammars, from Murray’s time to the present day, contain rules for aiding students and writers to decide where points, and what points, should be placed. These are of great utility, and every young person should familiarize himself with them as found, briefly stated, in books now in use. It should be borne in mind, however, that a close and slavish adherence to stated forms, without ascertaining their bearings in individual cases, tends to becloud the judgment, and may cause an author’s meaning to be obscured, or even concealed, rather than elucidated.

In books issued by different houses will be found great diversity in the manner of pointing similar and even the same sentences; and some part of what we have called “style” results from the effort of a {p77} house to be consistent with itself, and to establish a uniformity among its own issues.

The rules given in this chapter, and the observations accompanying them, are mainly the results of our own training and experience as compositor and proof-reader at different periods, covering in the aggregate more than twenty years. To bring out by punctuation the sense of difficult and involved sentences—which are of frequent occurrence—requires close attention and careful study,—attention not the less close, nor study the less careful, because prompted by the necessity of immediate practical application.

As all rules suitable to guide human conduct lie folded up in the golden rule, so all rules for pointing sentences are embraced in this: Punctuate so as to bring out the author’s meaning. And by their consonance with this great rule all special rules must be judged. Yet in this, as in all other matters, men disagree in their judgments; and we must be content in our diversities, until the academy desiderated by the “Spectator” shall have become an actual institution, invested with a quasi grammatical infallibility.

For instance, as to placing a comma between a nominative phrase or sentence and the predicate, the best authorities differ. Wilson’s rule is,—

“No point or pause-mark is admissible between the subject or nominative and the predicate, . . . .”

The “Practical Grammar,” by S. W. Clark, A.M., published by A. S. Barnes & Co., New York, gives the following rule: {p78}

“A phrase or sentence used as the subject of a verb, requires a comma between it and the verb.”

Of course the examples under the rule exhibit a corresponding difference.

“To be totally indifferent to praise or censure is a real defect in character.”—Wilson.

“To do good to others, constitutes an important object of existence.”—Clark.

Ingersoll’s Grammar (Portland, 1828) and Kerl’s—which last is now very extensively used—agree with Clark. Both have the same example as Wilson, but pointed as follows:—

“To be totally indifferent to praise or censure, is a real defect in character.”

Goold Brown (Grammar of Grammars) inserts the comma. Cobbett’s Grammar omits it.

Take up the first dozen books that come to hand, and you will find diversity of practice.

“The influences which Atterbury had fostered long lingered in the precincts.”—Stanley’s Westminster Abbey.

“The distinction between transcendental and transcendent, is observed by our elder divines and philosophers.”—Coleridge’s Biographia.

“The interruption of friendly relations between England and Spain was the fault . . . of the Emperor.”—Froude’s England.

The better method is to omit the comma, except in those cases where its insertion would prevent ambiguity; as in the quotation above, from Stanley, where there should have been a comma after “fostered”; {p79} as it stands, the word “long” may qualify either the word before or after it.

So, if you examine any number of volumes with reference to placing a comma before and, or, or nor, when three or more words, in the same category, are connected,—in some you will find “Faith, and hope, and charity”; in others, “Faith and hope and charity.” We have just met with the following lines in a well-known paper:

“Round and round the atoms fly,

Turf, and stone, and sea, and sky.”

Wilson’s example is (p. 38),—

“Let us freely drink in the soul of love and beauty and wisdom from all nature and art and history.”

In view of these and similar differences of practice, and contradiction of rules, one is tempted to say that it is of no moment whether the commas are inserted or not. But, leaving “style” out of the question, a proof-reader should endeavor to have a reason for every omission he allows, and for every insertion he makes. We advise him, then, in the first place to note which method seems required by the golden rule of elucidating the meaning; then consider, further, if the sentence already contains commas, whether inserting more would offend the eye. Let him decide each case on its own merits; leaning, when in doubt, in favor of such grammatical rule as he may have adopted. But use judgment; for the most precise grammarians lay down pages of exceptions; and Cobbett (Grammar, Letter XIV.) cannot be gainsaid when {p80} he writes, “It is evident, that, in many cases, the use of the comma must depend upon taste.”

When a phrase or clause, in its nature parenthetic, is quite closely connected with the parts of the sentence in which it is placed, the insertion of the comma before and after such phrase or clause “must depend upon taste.” The former comma especially, may often be omitted (see Obs. 10, under Rule 16, post). If the commas are inserted, we have a specimen of what is called “close pointing”; if omitted, we have “liberal pointing.”

Close pointing prevails in almost all publications except law-work, and in all doubtful cases puts in the comma. Liberal pointing, on the other hand, omits the points except when absolutely necessary to avoid ambiguity.

A middle course, retaining the spirit rather than adhering to the letter of the rules, will be found the safest. When, as will often be the case, a passage occurs, the meaning of which varies with the insertion or omission of a comma, while it would be grammatical either way, the compositor should follow the copy; the proof-reader should mark the passages with his quære; but if he first notices the fault when reading the press-proof, he should suffer it to stand as the author left it, letting all responsibility remain where it rightfully belongs.

Abbreviated words, besides the period denoting their abbreviation, require the same pointing as if they were spelled in full. Thus “Jno. Smith, Esq., of Worcester; Abel Soane, M.D.; and James Doe, {p81} LL.D.,—were appointed a comm. to take care of books, docs., etc., etc.,” has the same pointing as “John Smith, Esquire, of Worcester; Abel Soane, Doctor of Medicine; and James Doe, Doctor of Laws,—were appointed a committee to take care of books, documents, and so forth, and so forth.” But in some classes of work, as Directories, Catalogues of books, Genealogies, and where titles and abbreviations are of frequent occurrence, double pointing may be partially avoided by omitting the comma after a period which denotes an abbreviation.

Neatness requires the omission of the comma before leaders; thus,

John Roe . . . . . . New Oleans.

James Doe. . . . . . San Francisco.

is more pleasing to the eye than

John Roe, . . . . . . New Orleans.

James Doe,  . . . . . San Francisco.

Preambles to resolutions and laws are usually begun with “Whereas.” After this word a comma is sometimes heedlessly inserted, although the introductory word is not followed by a parenthetic clause. We append the most improved forms for punctuating and capitalizing preambles, resolves, and provisos:

Whereas the present national interest in the matter of the American fisheries has, &c.—Cong. Record, July, 11, 1888.

Whereas, owing to the sudden demise of the secretary, no notice was given of the receipts of the plans, etc.:

Resolved, That the whole matter be referred to a committee: Provided, [or Provided however,] That the whole expense shall not exceed, etc. {p82}

The semicolon should be placed before as, in an enumeration of particulars following a general statement; thus:

Many proper names admit of convenient contractions; as Jno., Wm., Benj., Jas., Chas.

But when as is not preceded by a general or formal statement, no point is necessary unless as is followed by a parenthetic clause; as:

Such names as John, Benjamin, William, admit of convenient contractions.

Some fishes, as, for instance, the cod, delight in cold baths, and are never found in water above 40° Fahr., unless in care of the cook.

But in liberal pointing, the commas before and after “for instance” would be omitted.

In regard to the points or marks connected with “viz.,” “namely,” and “to wit,” the punctuation varies according to the structure of the sentences in which they occur; but this does not prevent a publishing-house from having a style of its own. It is interesting to note the varieties which different offices present. We annex a few examples, which may be serviceable; to wit:

“Sussex Co., Del., July 5, 1776. We are sorry to say, that it is our opinion that they (viz: the enemies of the war) are not better affected than they were before the troops came.”—Am. Archives, 5th series, Vol. 1, p. 10.

I never depended on him for any men, or for any participation in the Georgia Campaign. Soon after, viz., May 8th, that department was transferred, etc.—Memoirs Gen. Sherman. {p83}

There is one case in which it is never right to do this; viz., when the opposite party, etc.—Cavendish’s style.

The library is open every secular day throughout the year, except the legal holidays, viz.,—Washington’s Birthday, Fast Day, Decoration Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day, Thanksgiving, and Christmas.—Brookline, Mass., Pub. Lib. Report, 1887.

Seven of the bishops lived to be over 80—viz. Llandaff 84, Winchester 84, etc.—Nineteenth Century, March, ’88.

Woburn has a population of about 12,000, grouped at four principal centers: namely, Woburn Centre, about 8000, etc.—Mass. Drainage Comm.

The Dawes bill deals with two subjects only, namely, the ownership of land and citizenship.—N. A. Review, March, ’88.

This, then, is the upshot of the second part of the law, namely: (1) that all to whom land is patented become at once citizens of the United States; (2) that all, etc.—ib.

There are four seasons, namely: spring, summer, autumn, winter.

Four administrative areas are thus created: two primary areas—namely, counties at large, and boroughs of 100,000 inhabitants and upwards.—Nineteenth Century Maga.

Annapolis, June 25, 1776. That four battalions be instantly raised . . . . each company to consist of ninety men, to wit: one captain, two lieutenants, etc.—Am. Archives.

When viz. or namely or as follows ends a paragraph, the colon is commonly inserted; but the dash or comma-dash or colon-dash may sometimes be noticed,—it is a matter of office style. (See Punctuation, Rule 8, post.)

But if, referring to a succeeding sentence or paragraph, the words “the following” or “as follows” appear, the sentence in which they occur should be closed with the colon or colon-dash, as in the following examples: {p84}

The description given of the English Nonconformists in many pages that stand for history, is as follows: That they started forth under a well-settled order of constitution and discipline of the Church of England, etc.—Ellis’s Puritan Age.

Mr. Faulkner, from the Committee on Pensions, to whom were referred the following bills, reported them severally without amendment, and submitted reports thereon:

A bill (H. R. 10318) granting a pension to Mary C. Davis; and

A bill (H. R. 8400) to place the name of John J. Mitchell on the pension-roll.—Congressional Record, July 22, ’88.

The hyphen is used to connect the parts of a compound word; to show the divisions of words into syllables; it is placed at the end of a line when a word is not finished; and it is sometimes placed between vowels, to show that they belong to different syllables (as “co-ordinate”). In regard to its use in compound words great diversity exists; and the proof-reader can have, as we believe, no fixed system which will apply to all varieties of work. In specifications for bridges, buildings, etc., the better way is to avoid compounding; for, in everything of that kind, one will find so many “door-sills,” “newel-posts,” “stair-balusters,” “pulley-stiles,” etc., that if he begin marking in the hyphens he will scarcely make an end of it, and many hyphens sadly deform a page: better put “door knobs,” “window frames,” “stair nosings,” etc., omitting hyphens.

Here, too, the dictionaries can scarcely be said to assist, if they do not even mislead. Worcester has “brickwork,” “brasswork,” without hyphens; {p85} “wood-work,” “iron-work,” with them. “Greenhouse” is closed up, while “school-house” is not; “wood-house” has a hyphen, “almshouse” has none. (Wilson writes “schoolhouse.”) Webster has “brick-work” with the hyphen, “woodwork” without it,—just reversing Worcester. Again, Worcester writes, “humblebee” and “bumblebee”: Webster, under B, has “bumble-bee, . . . . sometimes called humble-bee”; and, under H, writes “humblebee, . . . . often called bumblebee,” apparently forgetful of his previous hyphens.

To search for authority, then, in the matter of compounding words, will avail next to nothing. In a volume containing “School Committees’ Reports,”—and certainly school committees ought to know many things,—we find “blackboard” and “black-board”; and, on one page, “schoolbooks,” “schoolkeeping,” “schoolmaster,” “school-houses,” “school-checks.” “Semi-annual” is frequently printed with the hyphen, according to Webster; but Worcester, omitting the hyphen, has “semiannual.”

Thus it appears, that, in regard to compounding (by which we mean inserting the hyphen between the parts of a compound word), the proof-reader is left to his own discretion, and can do very much as he pleases. He should, however, adopt some method by which he can approximate to uniformity in his own work; for as to agreeing with anybody else, that is out of the question.

Perhaps as good a rule as can be laid down on this subject is to close up the word when {p86} compounding changes the accentuation; otherwise, insert the hyphen. Thus, “Quartermaster” has a different accentuation from the two words “quarter master”; therefore make one word of it, without the hyphen. “Head-assistant” is accented like the two words “head assistant,”—therefore insert the hyphen. By this rule “schoolhouse” and “blackboard” should be severally closed up; “salt-mine” takes the hyphen,—“saltsea” (adjective) does not.

The word “tree,” with a prefix indicating the kind, should be compounded; as “oak-tree,” “forest-tree,” “pine-tree,” etc. (Webster has a hyphen in “whiffle-tree,” Worcester prints “whiffletree.”)

“Cast-iron” and “wrought-iron” are usually compounded, and should always be so when used as adjectives; as “cast-iron pillars,” “wrought-iron boilers.”

“Temple-street place” (or “Place,” according to style), “Suffolk-street District,” “Pemberton-square School,” are quite correct; the hyphen is too frequently omitted in such cases.

The words ex officio do not require a hyphen, but some very reputable offices insert it.

Hyphens are sometimes used to indicate grotesque pronunciation, as in the following couplet from “Rejected Addresses”:

“In borrowed luster seemed to sham

The rose and red sweet Will-i-am.”

When two words connected by a conjunction are severally compound parts of a following word, the hyphen is omitted; as: {p87}

We use cast and wrought iron pillars.

I have pruned my peach and apple trees.

Some authors follow the German style, inserting the hyphens; thus:

We use cast- and wrought-iron pillars.

I have pruned my peach- and apple-trees.

But this style is rare.

Precision requires that hyphens should be inserted in fractions expressed in words; as “one-half,” “three-fifths,” etc.

How many oranges are seven and three fourths oranges?

There being no hyphen in the above example, the “seven” and “three” are in the same category as “peach” and “apple” in the last previous example. The answer is ten‐fourths, or 2½.

If “seven” is meant to express a whole number, a hyphen should be inserted after “three.”

A prolific source of trouble in correcting is wrong syllabication when it is thought necessary to carry part of a word to the succeeding line. Neither the English method of dividing on vowels, where this can be conveniently done, nor the American method of dividing on syllables, obtains exclusively in this country. Convenience, and the desire of spacing in such a manner as to make the lines look well, frequently determine the dividing letter; so that, in the same work, you may find “pro‐perty” and “prop‐erty,” “trea‐sure” and “treas‐ure.” In a recent English work, we note the following divisions: {p88} Pre‐bendaries, mea‐sure, pre‐decessors, supre‐macy, the Re‐formation, pro‐perty, theo‐logy, bre‐thren, pre‐paration.

But the division on the syllable is the mode most generally practiced in the United States, and we must, however reluctantly, adhere to it as closely as possible, until a convention of publishers shall sanction the adoption of the English usage. Our authorities close the first syllable of “fa‐ther” on the a, of “moth‐er” on the th, so that, practically, the latter word should not be divided at all; the English printer, without hesitation, places the hyphen after the a and the o respectively.

As to the word “discrepancy” there is a discrepancy. Webster accents the second syllable, and divides “discrep‐ancy”; while Worcester accents the first syllable, and divides “discre‐pancy.” In this, printers and readers must be governed by the “style” of the work upon which they are engaged.

One of the most frequently recurring errors noticed in reading first proof is the placing of an s at the end of a line when it should have been carried over. Corres‐pondence, des‐cribe, des‐cription, Aus‐tralian, are wrong, and are corrected daily; and their reappearance proves that in this, as in weightier matters, “error is wrought by want of thought.”

In newspapers, or any work which is to be read once and then cast aside, the carrying over of an ed or ly, or any other syllable of two letters, may perhaps be tolerated; but in bookwork such a division is inexcusable, except in side‐notes, or when the {p89} measure is very narrow. To avoid extremely wide or thin spacing, and to escape the trouble and expense of overrunning pages already imposed, it must be considered admissible, in certain cases, to carry over a consonant preceding the final syllable ed; as, expec‐ted, divi‐ded. We state this with some misgivings; but, as we have known it to be done by excellent readers and skillful printers, even by John Wilson himself, of blessed memory, we lay it down as allowable in extreme cases. Theories are elastic,—are expansible and compressible; but types of metal have set dimensions of extension, and, in some circumstances, absolutely refuse to budge,—wherefore theories must gracefully yield, and allow, it may be, a two‐letter division even in wide measure. Types are tyrannical, and will sometimes perpetrate solecisms under the plea of necessity.

An author can sometimes much improve the appearance of a page, by slight changes in the phraseology.

A good compositor studies to avoid divisions. Some printers, rather than divide a word, will justify a line by separating the words with two three‐em spaces. But no arbitrary rule can be laid down in this regard. A well‐spaced page with several divided words looks much better than a page unevenly spaced in which no divisions occur. The number of hyphens occurring in succession at the end of the lines on any page, should never exceed three.

In manuscript the dash occurs more frequently than any other mark of punctuation, many writers {p90} using it as a substitute for every other point. This habit very much retards the compositor in his task; for, as we have already intimated, he feels obliged to study the sense of his copy, and to waste his valuable time in considering how he shall best supply those aids to meaning which the author has rejected, and without which any work would be wholly unpresentable.

That the author of the paragraph quoted below pointed it with perfect accuracy before sending it to press, does not admit of a doubt. For the nonce, however, we will, with his leave, punctuate the passage in the manner in which the compositor frequently finds passages pointed on his “takes”; thus:

“It has been said—and—no doubt—truthfully—that the smartest boys do not go to college. Yet—it is evident—to every one competent to judge—that the ablest men have been at college.”

With so many dashes before him, it would not be strange if the compositor were to retain some of them; and the proof might, perhaps, appear as follows:

“It has been said—and no doubt truthfully—that the smartest boys do not go to college. Yet it is evident to every one competent to judge, that the ablest men have been at college.”

This is much improved; and, if we substitute commas for the dashes in the first sentence, the punctuation may be considered unobjectionable.

Beginners at the “case” are often puzzled in regard to the insertion of commas before the dashes which {p91} inclose a parenthetic clause. To decide this point, it is enough to notice whether or not a comma would be used, were the parenthetic clause omitted. This, we think, will be readily understood by reference to the following examples:

“It was necessary not only that Christianity should assume a standard absolutely perfect, but that it should apply a perfect law to those complex and infinitely diversified cases which arise when law is violated.”

Now, if a parenthetic clause is inserted before the word “but,” the comma should be retained, and another placed at the end of the inserted clause; thus:

“It was necessary, not only that Christianity should assume a standard absolutely perfect,—which, however far from anything that man has ever done, would be comparatively easy,—but that it should apply a perfect law,” etc.

If there is no comma where the clause is to be inserted, dashes alone should be used:

“In the completed volume of the third report, the countries wherein education has received the most attention are treated of at length.”

If a parenthetic clause be inserted after “countries,”—where there is no comma,—only dashes are required; thus:

“In the completed volume of the third report, the countries—Prussia, for instance—wherein education has received the most attention are treated of at length.”

A thin space should be placed before, and also after, a dash.

If a parenthesis is inserted in a part of a sentence {p92} where no point is required, no point should be placed before or after the marks of parenthesis.

“By living sparingly, and according to the dictates of reason, in less than a year I found myself (some persons, perhaps, will not believe it) entirely freed from all my complaints.”—Cornaro.

As a general rule, if the parenthesis occur after a punctuated clause, the point should be placed after the latter mark of parenthesis.

“Popham’s monument, by the intercession of his wife’s friends (who had interest at Court), was left in St. John’s Chapel on condition either of erasing the inscription, or turning it inwards.”

“Artist: Kneller (1723). Architects: Taylor (1788); Chambers (1796); Wyatt (1813).”

“Antiquities of St. Peter’s, by J. Crull (usually signed J. C.).”

If a parenthesis which closes with a note of exclamation or interrogation is inserted where a point occurs, that point should precede the first mark of parenthesis.

“Where foresight and good morals exist, (and do they not here?) the taxes do not stand in the way of an industrious man’s comforts.”

“He directed the letter to Gnat Smith, (spelling Nat with a G!) and deposited it in a fire‐alarm box.”

An exclamation point is often found preceding the first mark of parenthesis.

“Ay, here now! (exclaimed the Critic,) here come Coleridge’s metaphysics!”—Biographia Literaria.

“I am, sir, sensible”—“Hear! Hear!” (they cheer him.) {p93}

When a parenthesis occurs within a parenthesis, brackets should be substituted for the first and last parenthetic marks.

“As for the other party [I mean (do not misunderstand me) the original inventor], he was absent from the country, at that time.”

“Brackets are generally used . . . to inclose an explanation, note, or observation, standing by itself.”—Parker’s Aids.

A short comment inserted in a paragraph by a reviewer is placed in brackets.

“The sacks were badly eaten by rags [so in the affidavit], and the almonds had run out.”

In transcripts of trials at law, brackets are used to inclose statements of things done in court, which things would not appear in a report of the verbal proceedings alone; as,—

“Ans. About a quarter past ten, he came into my shop, and picked out a cane. . . . .

“Gore. Of what wood was it made?

“Ans. It was a good piece of hickory—heavy for hickory. . . . .

“[The stick was handed to the witness, who declared it to be the same he had sold Mr. Charles Austin.]

“Gore. What sticks had he usually bought of you?”—Trial of Selfridge.

Whether the words in brackets should also be in italics is a matter of style. In the following passage from the same report, italics are used: {p94}

“Gore. [Showing the fracture of the hat on the fore‐part.] Is not that the fore‐part of the hat, as this leather [that on the hinder part] marks the part of the hat that is worn behind?”

For inserting commas or other points after, before, or within brackets, the same rules apply as in case of marks of parenthesis.

Whether when a noun singular terminates in s, its possessive case requires an additional s is yet an open question. We have no hesitation in giving an affirmative answer, especially in the case of proper names. If Mr. Adams were to manufacture ale, one might, perhaps, from prohibitory considerations, advise him to advertise it as “Adams’ ale”; but should Mr. Adams have no fear of the law, he would avoid all misunderstanding by calling it “Adams’s ale.” It may be objected that the position of the apostrophe makes the matter sufficiently clear without the additional s. Yes,—to the eye; but to the ear the propriety of the additional s becomes very apparent. “Jacob’s pillow” and “Jacobs’s pillow” may be of very different materials. But, to avoid too much sibilation, we read “for conscience’ sake,” “for goodness’ sake,” etc.

The apostrophe, with s subjoined, is used to denote the plural of letters and figures.

“The discipline which is imposed by proving that some x’s are some y’s, and that other x’s are all y’s, will enable you to pulverize any hot‐headed deacon who may hereafter attempt to prove that you had better be looking out for another pastorate.”—Ad Clerum.

“This 7 differs from the other 7’s.” {p95}

The apostrophe may be used in denoting the plural whenever its use will assist in avoiding obscurity.

“The children called loudly for their pa’s and ma’s.”

For convenient reference we append a series of rules and examples, which, we think, will be found useful by teachers and scholars, and our friends of the press.

RULES OF PUNCTUATION.

I. PERIOD, OR FULL POINT.

1. The period is used at the end of every complete sentence which is not interrogative or exclamatory.

2. Sentences interrogative and exclamatory in form, sometimes take the period.

Will you call at my office, say on Tuesday next, or whenever you happen to be in town, and much oblige—

Yours truly,

JOHN SMITH.

How much better it is, considering the saving of distance to the pupils, that two small schoolhouses should be built, rather than one large one.

3. The period is put after initials when used alone; also after abbreviations.

- J. Q. Adams.

- Supt. of R. R.

- A. M.

4. Place a period before decimals, and between pounds and shillings.

- The French meter is 3.2808992 feet.

- £24. 6s. 8d.

- 5.75 miles.

5. A period should always be put after roman numerals, except when used in the paging of prefaces, etc.

George III. came to the throne in 1760.

OBSERVATION 1. In many modern works the period is omitted; as,—

William I made a mistake.

There being no comma after “William,” it is supposed to be obvious that the mistake was made by William the First. The insertion or omission of the period is becoming wholly a matter of printing-office style.

II. COLON.

6. A colon is put at the end of a clause complete in sense, when something follows which tends to make the sense fuller or clearer. (See Rules 9 and 13.)

There is yet another sphere for the electric motor to fill: that of street railway propulsion.—N. A. Review; April, 1888.

In free states no man should take up arms, but with a view to defend his country and its laws: he puts off the citizen when he enters the camp; but it is because he is a citizen, and would continue to be so, that he makes himself for a while a soldier.—Blackstone’s Commentaries, Book I., Ch. 13.

7. The last of several clauses that introduce a concluding remark or sentiment should be followed by a colon, if the preceding clauses have been punctuated with semicolons.

A pickpocket in every car; a cheat at every station; every third switch on the road misplaced; the danger of being hurled from the track, and then burned alive: these considerations prevent my traveling on the railroad of which you speak.

OBS. 2. In examples like the above, a very common and perhaps better method is to put a comma and dash in place of the colon. The colon is neater, but more old-fashioned. (See second example under Rule 10.)

8. The colon is commonly used whenever an example, a quotation, or a speech is introduced.

The Scriptures give us an amiable representation of the Deity in these words: “God is love.”

OBS. 3. Modern writers, instead of the colon, mostly use the semicolon, dash, or period. Our first example, under Rule 9,—with a colon substituted for the semicolon,—might with propriety have been placed under Rule 6. We prefer the semicolon, however; {p98} and if the word for were inserted in the example mentioned, the colon would be inadmissible:

“Let there be no strife between theology and science; for there need be none.”

In reprinting old works, the colon should be carefully retained, as essential to a clear understanding of them.

The colon is generally placed after as follows, the following, in these words, thus, or any other word or phrase which formally introduces something; and when the matter introduced forms a distinct paragraph, the colon may or may not be followed by a dash, as the style of the author or office may require.

III. SEMICOLON.

9. When two or more clauses of a sentence are not so closely connected as to admit the use of a comma, a semicolon is used.

Let there be no strife between theology and science; there need be none.

Wisdom hath builded her house; she hath hewn out her seven pillars; she hath killed her beasts; she hath mingled her wine; she hath also furnished her table.

10. When a number of particulars depend on an introductory or a final clause, such particulars may be separated from each other by a semicolon.

There are three difficulties in authorship: to write anything worth the publishing; to get honest men to publish it; and to get sensible men to read it.

To present a general view of the whole Vedic literature; to define its extent; to divide it into well-distinguished classes of writings; to portray the circumstances of their origin, and the stage of cultural development which they represent; and to explain the method of their preservation and transmission to us,—were some of the objects which Müller had in view. {p99}

11. Loosely connected clauses of a sentence should be separated by semicolons, if those clauses or any of them are subdivided by commas.

As the rays of the sun, notwithstanding their velocity, injure not the eye by reason of their minuteness; so the attacks of envy, notwithstanding their number, ought not to wound our virtue by reason of their insignificance.

OBS. 4. In the first sentence of the following example, a comma between the clauses is sufficient, because there are no points in the clauses; but the second sentence may serve to illustrate Rules 11 and 12:

As there are some faults that have been termed faults on the right side, so there are some errors that might be denominated errors on the safe side. Thus, we seldom regret having been too mild, too cautious, or too humble; but we often repent having been too violent, too precipitate, or too proud.

12. When two clauses not closely dependent on each other, are connected by but, for, and, or some similar connective, they are separated by a semicolon.

I will not be revenged, and this I owe to my enemy; but I will remember, and this I owe to myself.

A wise minister would rather preserve peace than gain a victory; because he knows that even the most successful war leaves nations generally more poor, always more profligate, than it found them.

Ingratitude in a superior is very often nothing more than the refusal of some unreasonable request; and if the patron does too little, it is not unfrequently because the dependent expects too much.

13. Phrases are often set off by a semicolon, viz.:

a. Explanatory phrases.

There remain to us moderns, only two roads to success; discovery and conquest.

b. Participial and adjective phrases. {p100}

I have first considered whether it be worth while to say anything at all, before I have taken any trouble to say it well; knowing that words are but air, and that both are capable of much condensation.

These roads are what all roads should be; suitable for light carriages, and for heavy-laden wagons.

c. Any phrase, especially if elliptical, or if divisible into smaller portions by commas.

(OBS. 5. In speaking or in writing, we “almost always leave out some of the words which are necessary to a full expression of our meaning. This leaving out is called the ellipsis.”)

John Milton; born Dec. 9, 1608; completed Paradise Lost, 1665; died Nov. 10, 1674.

IV. COMMA.

14. Repeated words or expressions; three or more serial terms; two unconnected serial terms,—are separated from each other by the comma.

a. Repeated words or expressions.

Shut, shut the door.

I, I, I, I itself, I,

The inside and outside, the what and the why,

The when and the where, and the low and the high,

All I, I, I, I itself, I.

Give me back, give me back the wild freshness of morning.

b. Three or more serial terms.

Shakspeare, Butler, and Bacon have rendered it extremely difficult for all who come after them to be sublime, witty, or profound.

The firm of Smith, Longman, Jones, Llewellyn, & Co.

But some printers, while observing the above rule in general, except the names of firms and railroad companies; which, in their publications, appear as follows: {p101}

The firm of Longman, Jones, Llewellyn & Co.

The Atchison, Topeka and Santa Fé R. R. Co.

c. Two unconnected serial terms.

He had a keen, ready wit.

OBS. 6. The second example under a (“The inside and outside, the what and the why,”) furnishes an illustration of the mode of punctuating terms joined in pairs.

OBS. 7. Style sometimes requires the omission of the comma before and, or, nor, when one of these connectives precedes the last term of a series: as “Shakspeare, Butler and Bacon have rendered it extremely difficult for all who come after them to be sublime, witty or profound.” But when the words are all in the same predicament, the comma should be inserted; e. g.,—if you wish to state that three certain persons are wise, you would point thus:

“Thomas, Richard, and John are wise.”

But if Richard and John are the Solons, and you wish to inform Thomas of that fact, you would point thus:

“Thomas, Richard and John are wise.”

So, in the first example under b, if it is desired to qualify the three adjectives by the phrase “in the highest degree,” the comma after witty must stand: “in the highest degree sublime, witty, or profound.” But if that phrase is intended to apply to sublime only, the pointing should be thus: “in the highest degree sublime, witty or profound.”

15. Phrases, clauses, and words, inverted, or otherwise not in their natural position, generally require to be set off by a comma.

Into this illustrious society, my friend was joyfully received.

When we quarrel with ourselves, we are sure to be losers.

To satisfy you on that point, I will make a short argument.

He, like the world, his ready visits pays,

Where fortune smiles.

Roe, Richard. Doe, John.

OBS. 8. The exceptions to this rule are numerous. If the first and last words of a passage are related (for him the summer wind murmured); if the inverted phrase be brief, and can be read in close connection with what follows (in youth we have little sympathy with the misfortunes of age); or if the principal clause is itself inverted (In the center of the common rises a noble monument),—the comma is usually omitted.

OBS. 9. In long lists of proper names, as Directories, etc., it is usual to omit the comma, although the names are transposed, and to print thus:

- Smith James W.

- Thomson Theophilus.

16. When the principal sentence is broken to receive an incidental or parenthetic expression, a comma is placed at the break, and another at the end of the inserted clause.

Rulers and magistrates should attempt to operate on the minds of their respective subjects, if possible, by reward rather than punishment.

Some writers, in a vain attempt to be cutting and dry, give us only that which is cut and dried.

It is known to every physician, that, whatever lazy people may say to the contrary, early rising tends to longevity.

Go, then, where, wrapt in fear and gloom,

Fond hearts and true are sighing.

OBS. 10. The former comma is frequently omitted. Especially is this the case when the previous part of the sentence has required commas. Liberal pointing would omit the comma after “where,” in the above example. And in the following sentence, from General Marcy’s “Ramblings in the West,” note the omission of the comma after “and,” and from the parenthetic clause “it was believed”:

This, with the destruction of our trains, consumed the greater part of our winter supplies, and as they could not be replenished from the Missouri River before the following June, General Johnston, the commander, determined to send a detachment directly over the mountains to New Mexico, from whence it was believed supplies could be obtained earlier than from farther east. {p103}

Notice, also, the omission of the comma after “and” and “but,” in the following paragraphs:

He left college; and forsaken by his friends, he took refuge with the parliament party.—Marsh, Eccl. Hist.

The written law is sufficient to decide this case; but inasmuch as the irregularity in question is a fertile source of disputes, the case has been deemed worthy of insertion.—Cavendish.

(The most common parenthetic expressions are at least, at most, accordingly, as it were, beyond question, consequently, doubtless, furthermore, generally speaking, in the mean time, on the other hand, etc.)

17. Words or phrases expressing contrast, or emphatically distinguished, and terms having a common relation to some other term that follows them, require the comma.

a. Contrast or notable difference.

His style is correct, yet familiar.

I asked for money, not advice.

’Twas fat, not fate, by which Napoleon fell.

Although Prince Hohenlohe was far more specific in pointing out what ought to be avoided than in showing what ought to be done, yet there could be no mistaking the course which the government was intending to pursue.

They are charitable, not to benefit the poor, but to court the rich.

OBS. 11. Two contrasted words having a common dependence, and connected by but, though, yet, or as well as, should not be separated; as, There are springs of clear but brackish water.

b. Terms having a common relation to a succeeding term.

Ordered, That the Committee on Banking be, and they hereby are, instructed to report a bill. {p104}

That officer was not in opposition to, but in close alliance with, thieves.

OBS. 12. Some proof-readers, however, omit the second comma, when but a single word follows the latter proposition; as, “Many states were in alliance with, and under the protection of Rome.” The better method is to insert the point. “[Bonner was] an accomplished Italian, and probably also a Spanish, scholar.”—Froude.

18. Correlative terms, or expressions having a reciprocal relation, are separated by a comma.

The farther we look back into those distant periods, all the objects seem to become more obscure.

The more a man has, the more he wants.

As he that knows how to put proper words in proper places evinces the truest knowledge of books, so he that knows how to put fit persons in fit stations evinces the truest knowledge of men.

It is not so difficult a task to plant new truths, as to root out old errors.

Where MacDonald sits, there is the head of the table.

Cincinnatus and Washington were greater in their retirement, than Cæsar and Napoleon at the summit of their ambition; since it requires less magnanimity to win the conquest, than to refuse the spoil.

OBS. 13. Sometimes when that, and generally when as or than, so that or such that is used, the connection is too close to admit the comma.

Cromwell’s enemies say that he always fought with more sincerity than he prayed.

Your house is larger than mine.

Paper is not so good as gold.

The old gentleman is so infirm that he can scarcely move.

He told such a story that we were all deceived by it. {p105}

19. Words used in direct address, and independent and absolute words, with what belongs to them, are separated from the rest of the sentence by commas.

Q. You say, Mr. Witness, that you were present?

A. Yes, sir.

Flow gently, sweet Afton, among thy green braes.

My son, give me thy heart.

At length, having fought the good fight, he left the world in peace.

To confess the truth, I was in fault.

Richard Roe, his father being dead, succeeded to the estate.

Silence having been obtained, the speaker went on with his remarks.

20. The clauses of a compound sentence may be separated by a comma when the connection is too close for the semicolon.

The winds roared in the woods, and the torrents tumbled from the hills.

Hasten to your homes, and there teach your children to detest the deeds of tyranny.

It has, by some grammarians, been given as a rule, to use a comma to set off every part of a compound sentence, which part has in it a verb not in the infinitive mode.

OBS. 14. A dependent clause should be separated by a comma, unless closely connected.

It argues a defect of method, when an author is obliged to write notes upon his own works.

Unless we hurry to the beach, the tide will overtake us.

Whatever reception the present age may give this work, we rest satisfied with our endeavors to deserve a kind one.

When the Tartars make a Lama, their first care is to place him in a dark corner of the temple.

OBS. 15. If a clause beginning with as, because, if, wherever, how, lest, than, that, when, where, whether, while, why, or any {p106} adverb of time, place, or manner, follows a clause with which it is closely connected in sense, it is not set off by a comma: “He went away when the boat left.” “We love him because he first loved us.” “He will pay if he is able.” “Tell me whether you will return.”

OBS. 16. An infinitive phrase closely connected with what it modifies, should not be set off by a comma; as, “We use language to express our thoughts.” “Nouns do not vary their endings to denote certain cases.” But if the infinitive phrase is preceded by in order, or if it is remote from what it modifies, it should be set off by a comma. “He collected a great many young elms from various parts of England, to adorn his grounds.” “If dissimulation is ever to be pardoned, it is that which men have recourse to, in order to obtain situations which will enlarge their sphere of general usefulness.”

21. A word or phrase used in apposition, to explicate or illustrate a previous word or phrase, should be set off by commas; but if the words in apposition constitute a single phrase or a proper name, they should not be separated.

a. Comma required.

Johnson, that mighty Caliban of literature, is held up to view in the pages of Boswell.

The alligator, or cayman, is found in the Orinoco.

Paul, the apostle of the Gentiles, was eminent for his zeal and knowledge.

If the position of the terms in apposition is reversed, commas are required.

The apostle of the Gentiles, Paul, was eminent for his zeal and knowledge.

That old last century poet, Crowley, sings thus.

b. Comma not required.

Johnson the lexicographer completed his dictionary in seven years. {p107}

We the undersigned agree to pay the sums set against our names respectively.

Jeremy the prophet commanded them that were carried away to take of the fire, as it hath been signified.

I Paul have written it with mine own hand.

The poet Chaucer lived in the reign of Richard II.

Sir John Walpole understood two grand secrets of state: the power of principal, and the weakness of principle.

22. A simple sentence usually requires no point except the period at the end of it.

Count Bismarck has preserved a pleasant intimacy with his old preceptor.

OBS. 17. When the subject is a clause ending with a verb, or with a noun that might be mistaken for the nominative, a comma should be inserted before the predicate.

That winter campaigns are undertaken, shows a desire to kill the Indians.

Captain Smith’s obedience to orders, issued in his promotion.

Every year that is added to the age of the world, serves to lengthen the thread of its history.

He that gives a portion of his time and talent to the investigation of mathematical truth, will come to all other questions with a decided advantage over his opponents.

In the following sentence, a comma after “them” might not be improper (for we once heard a reader place a pause after “attacked”),—but we shall not attack one of General Sherman’s sentences, lest we “get the worst of it.”

During this campaign hundreds if not thousands of miles of similar intrenchments were built by both armies, and as a rule whichever party attacked one of them got the worst of it.—Memoirs Gen. W. T. Sherman.

OBS. 18. Whether a comma should be inserted after the verb to be, when that verb is followed by an infinitive clause which might by transposition be made the nominative, is a question on which the best authorities differ.

First Method.—The highest art of the mind of man is to possess itself with tranquillity in the hour of danger. {p108}

Second Method.—The highest art of the mind of man is, to possess itself with tranquillity in the hour of danger.

We are of opinion that usage is in favor of the omission of the comma, as in the following examples:

The proposed object of the Union Dictionary is to comprehend at once all that is truly useful in Johnson, Sheridan, and Walker.—Thomas Browne.

The grandest of all conditions is to be at once healthy and wise and good.—D’Arcy Thompson.

OBS. 19. When the subject is an infinitive phrase, the better method is not to separate it; as, “To be totally indifferent to praise or censure is a real defect in character.” Still there is excellent authority for inserting a comma, thus: “To be totally indifferent to praise or censure, is a real defect in character.” In sentences of this kind we advise the proof-reader to omit the comma unless the author is uniform in the insertion of it.

OBS. 20. Some grammarians set off by a comma the predicate, when it refers to separated nominatives preceding it; as, “The benches, chairs, and tables, were thrown down.” And, again, we find this example given: “Veracity, justice, and charity, are essential virtues.” So, in the ordinances of the City of Boston, “if any person or persons shall roast any cocoa,” without having complied with certain conditions, “he, she, or they, shall forfeit and pay for every such offense,” etc.,—a comma appearing after they, although a conjunction precedes it. But the weight of authority is against separating the last noun or pronoun of such compound subject from the verb when the conjunction is used. The last quotation, above given, should read, “he, she, or they shall forfeit,” etc.

23. A comma should be placed before or after a word or phrase, to associate it with the group to which it belongs, if, without the comma, the sentence would be equivocal; and generally, a comma may be inserted wherever its use will prevent ambiguity.

This man, only cared to lay up money.

This man only, cared to lay up money.

Whoever lives opprobriously, must perish.

The first maxim among philosophers is, that merit only, makes distinction. {p109}

The delight which I found in reading Pliny, first inspired me with the idea of a work of this nature.—Goldsmith.

My communication was offered and refused.

My communication was offered, and refused on account of its length.

OBS. 21. We recently met with this last sentence, pointed as follows: “My communication was offered and refused, on account of its length”; but it is not easy to see why the length of a communication should be assigned as the reason for having offered it.

“Every favor a man receives in some measure sinks him below his dignity.”—Goldsmith.

OBS. 22. A comma should have been placed after receives.

24. No comma is put between two words or phrases in apposition, following the verbs think, name, make, consider, and others of a similar meaning.

They made him their ruler.

They called him captain.

They saluted him king.

I esteem you my friend.

Believing him an honest man, we elected him treasurer.

We constituted our Secretary a depositary of German books.

I consider him a gentleman.

OBS. 23. Of the terms in apposition, one is the subject, and the other the predicate, of to be, understood (“They made him to be their ruler”). The rule might, therefore, be worded thus: When, of two terms in apposition, one is predicated of the other, no comma is required.

25. In a compound sentence, the comma is often inserted where a verb is omitted.

In literature, our taste will be discovered by that which we give; our judgment, by that which we withhold.

Wit consists in finding out resemblances; judgment, in discerning differences. {p110}

In the pursuit of intellectual pleasure lies every virtue; of sensual, every vice.

Sheridan once observed of a certain speech, that all its facts were invention, and all its wit, memory.

OBS. 24. But sometimes the comma is not inserted: especially when the style is lively; when the clauses have a common relation to something that follows; or when they are connected by a conjunction.

Could Johnson have had less prejudice, Addison more profundity, or Dryden more time, they would have been well qualified for the arduous office of a critic.

The Germans do not appear so vivacious, nor the Turks so energetic, as to afford triumphant demonstrations in behalf of the sacred weed.

The boat was tight, the day fine, the bait tempting, and the fishes hungry.

26. A short quotation, a remarkable expression, or a short observation somewhat in manner of a quotation, is set off by the comma.

Plutarch calls lying, the vice of slaves.

It hurts a man’s pride to say, I do not know.

Cicero observed to a degenerate patrician, “I am the first of my family, but you are the last of yours.”

An upright minister asks, what recommends a man; a corrupt minister, who.

There is an old poet who has said, “No deity is absent, if prudence is with thee.”

They tell me here, that people frequent the theater to be instructed as well as amused.

The old proverb, “Too much freedery breeds despise,” is now rendered, “Familiarity breeds contempt.”

OBS. 25. When the introductory clause is short, the comma may be omitted; as “Charles Fox said that restorations are the most bloody of all revolutions.”—“Madame de Staël admits that she discovered, as she grew old, the men could not find out that wit in her at fifty, which she possessed at twenty-five.” {p111}

27. Numbers are divided by the comma into periods of three figures each.

The distance of the sun from the earth is usually stated at 95,000,000 miles.

OBS. 26. In a number expressing the year of an era, the comma is not used; as, July 4, 1876. In tabular work it is very neat and convenient to omit the comma, as in the following example:

The number of letters in 1600 lbs. of Pica is as follows:

a | 17000
b | 3200
c | 6000
d | 8800
e | 24000, | etc.

OBS. 27. In some offices the style requires all numbers less than 1,000 to be expressed in words; 1,000 and upwards in figures. Some printers insert the comma before hundreds, only when five figures or more occur.

28. Restrictive phrases or clauses are not set off by the comma.

He reviewed such regiments as were armed with Enfield rifles.

They flatter the vanities of those with whom they have to do.

Attend to the remarks which the preacher is about to make.

Bishop Watson most feelingly regrets the valuable time he was obliged to squander away.

A false concord in words may be pardoned in him who has produced a true concord between such momentous things as the purest faith and the profoundest reason.

“He is known by his company” is a proverb that does not invariably apply.

Cattle which live in herds, are subject to various diseases. {p112}

OBS. 28. Adjective elements which are simply descriptive, and not restrictive, should be set off by commas; thus:

Cattle, which live in herds, are subject to various diseases.

The first verse of the fourteenth chapter of Job, in the King James Bible, reads:

Man that is born of a woman is of few days, and full of trouble.

The Douay Bible reads:

Man born of a woman, living for a short time, is filled with many miseries.

The Protestant Episcopal Burial Service points correctly:

Man, that is born of a woman, hath but a short time to live, and is full of misery.

V. THE NOTE OF INTERROGATION.

29. The note of Interrogation is placed at the end of a direct question.

Can gold gain friendship?

Is that the best answer you can give to the fourteenth cross-interrogatory?

Is any among you afflicted?

Oh, lives there, Heaven, beneath thy dread expanse,

One hopeless, dark idolater of Chance?

OBS. 29. When several distinct questions occur in succession, the practice of some writers is to separate them by commas or semicolons, placing the question-mark at the close only; as:

“Where was Lane then; what was his situation?”—Trial of Selfridge.

“Am I Dromio, am I your man, am I myself?”

This we regard as incorrect. Each several question should have the interrogation point.

Dro. S. Do you know me, sir? am I Dromio? am I your man? am I myself? {p113}

Rosalind. What did he when thou saw’st him? What said he? How looked he? Wherein went he? What makes he here? Did he ask for me? Where remains he? How parted he with thee? and when shalt thou see him again?

OBS. 30. If several questions in one sentence are joined by connectives, each question takes the note of interrogation. “Have I not all their letters to meet me in arms by the ninth of the next month? and are they not, some of them, set forward already?”

OBS. 31. When a sentence contains several interrogative clauses, having a common relation to, or dependence on, one term, a single interrogation point is sufficient.

“Was I, for this, nigh wrecked upon the sea;
And twice by awkward wind from England’s bank
Drove back again unto my native clime?”

“By sensational preaching do you mean an incoherent raving about things in general and nothing in particular; a perversion of every text; an insult of common sense; a recital of anecdotes which are untrue, and a use of illustrations which are unmeaning?”

Who will count the value to a man to be raised one remove higher above the brute creation; to be able to look with the eye of intelligence, instead of vacant ignorance, upon the world in which he lives; to penetrate as far as mortals may into the mystery of his own existence, and to be made capable of enjoying the rational delights of that existence; to be protected by his knowledge from every species of quackery, fanaticism, and imposture; and to know how to estimate and use the gifts which a beneficent Creator has spread around him?—Prof. L. Stevens, Girard Coll.

“What can preserve my life, or what destroy?”

NOTE.—An assertion stating a question does not take the interrogation point; as, “The question is, what lenses have the greatest magnifying power.”

VI. THE NOTE OE EXCLAMATION.

30. The note of Exclamation is applied to expressions of sudden or violent emotion; such as surprise, grief, joy, love, hatred, etc.

O piteous spectacle! O noble Cæsar! O woful day!

An old lady one day importuning Mahomet to know what {p114} she ought to do, in order to gain Paradise,—“My good lady,” answered the Prophet, “old women never get there.”—“What! never get to Paradise!” returned the matron in a fury. “Never!” says he, “for they grow young by the way!”

Why was this heart of mine formed with so much sensibility! or why was not my fortune adapted to its impulse! Poor houseless creatures! The world will give you reproaches, but will not give you relief.

Ah! well of old the Psalmist prayed

“Thy hand, not man’s, on me be laid!”

Earth frowns below, Heaven weeps above,

And man is hate, but God is love!

31. The exclamation point is used in invocations.

Father of all! in every age adored.

Gentle spirit of sweetest humor who erst did sit upon the easy pen of my beloved Cervantes!

Oh, my brothers! oh, my sisters!

Would to God that ye were near!

32. Several exclamation points are sometimes used together, to express ridicule, or to intensify surprise, etc.

Malherbe observed, that a good poet was of no more service to the church or the state, than a good player at ninepins!!

VII. THE DASH.

33. The Dash is used where a sentence breaks off abruptly.

Charles. You must invent some ingenious subterfuge—some—some kind of—

Project. I understand; not a suggestio falsi, but a mild suppressio veri. {p115}

Charles. Oh, is that what you call it? There is a shorter word—

Project. There is; but it is not professional.

I shall divide the subject into fifteen heads, and then I shall argue thus—but, not to give you and myself the spleen, be contented at present with an Indian tale.

34. The dash is used before and after a parenthetic clause, when not closely enough connected to admit the comma.

But it remains—and the thought is not without its comforting significance, however hardly it may bear on individual cases—that no bestowal of bounty, no cultivation of the amenities of life, . . . can wipe out the remembrance of even doubtful loyalty in the day of trial.

OBS. 32. If a parenthetic clause is inserted where a comma is required in the principal sentence, a comma should be placed before each of the dashes inclosing such clause. (See last paragraph on p. 90).

I should like to undertake the Stonyshire side of that estate,—it’s in a dismal condition,—and set improvements on foot.

35. Several clauses having a common dependence, are separated by a comma and a dash from the clause on which they depend.

To think that we have mastered the whole problem of existence; that we have discovered the secret of creation; that we have solved the problem of evil, and abolished mystery from nature and religion and life,—leads naturally to a precipitation of action, a summary dealing with evils, etc. (See Example and Obs. under Rule 7.)

36. The dash is used with the comma, the semicolon, and the colon, which it lengthens, or renders more emphatic. {p116}

We read of “merry England”;—when England was not merry, things were not going well with it. We hear of “the glory of hospitality,” England’s pre-eminent boast,—by the rules of which all tables, from the table of the twenty-shilling freeholder to the table in the baron’s hall and abbey refectory, were open at the dinner-hour to all comers.—Froude.

Matricaria, n. A genus of plants, including the feverfew, or wild camomile;—so called from the supposed value of some species as remedies for certain disorders.—Webster’s Dictionary.

They did it without being at all influenced by the Anabaptists of the continent:—the examples of some of these had rather kept them together.—D’Aubigne.

37. When words are too closely connected to admit a strictly grammatical point, the dash is used to denote a pause.

My hopes and fears

Start up alarmed, and o’er life’s narrow verge

Look down—on what? A fathomless abyss.

The king of France, with twice ten thousand men,

Marched up the hill, and then—marched down again.

38. When a word or phrase is repeated emphatically, or echoed, it is preceded by the dash.

The immediate question is upon the rejection of the President’s message. It has been moved to reject it,—to reject it, not after it was considered, but before it was considered!

The world continues to attach a peculiar significance to certain names,—a significance which at once recurs to one on hearing the isolated name unapplied to any individual.

39. An equivalent expression, or an idea repeated in different words, is properly set off by the comma and dash. {p117}

These are detached thoughts,—memoranda for future use.

Wolsey’s return to power was discussed openly as a probability,—a result which Anne Boleyn never ceased to fear.

There are three kinds of power,—wealth, strength, and talent.

The value of our actions will be confirmed and established by those two sure and sateless destroyers of all other things,—Time and Death.

The present time has one advantage over every other,—it is our own.

Those who submit to encroachments to-day are only preparing for themselves greater evils for to-morrow,—humiliation or resistance.

OBS. 33. In a portion of the examples under this rule, the dash appears to supply the place of viz., or namely.

40. A dash placed between two numbers indicates that the natural series between those numbers is understood.

OBS. 34. If a writer refer to “pp. 90, 95,” he means those two pages only; but if he cite “pp. 90–95,” the reference is to pages 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, and 95.—In dates of the same century, the figures denoting the century are omitted in the second number: “He has the Farmer’s Almanac for 1810–70,—sixty-one years.” (It will be observed, that, under this rule, the short or en dash is used.)

The style of the Government Printing Office, Washington, requires an apostrophe to denote the elision of the centuries; as 1889–’90.

41. An Ellipsis of letters is denoted by a dash.

- Ex-President J—ns—n.

- King F—der—ck W——m.

42. When a sentence is abrupted (1) to form a heading, or (2) for a signature, or (3) to admit a {p118} new paragraph, or for other purposes, a dash is used at the break; as:

From the preceding tables we are now able to formulate in concise language the—

GRAND RESULT.

1. The number of employees . . . is at least 1,250,000.—Mass. Labor Report.

It is useless for you to dissemble in the presence of—

Yours, etc.

JOHN SMITH.

The greatest cowards in our regiment were the greatest rascals in it. There was Sergeant Kumber and Ensign—

We’ll talk of them, said my father, another time.—Sterne.

VIII. VARIOUS MARKS USED IN WRITING AND PRINTING.

The Hyphen is used to denote the division of a
word into syllables; as, in-ter-dict: it is placed at the
end of a line (usually at the close of a syllable),
when a word is not finished: and it connects the
parts of a compound word; as, “At Cambridge,
Cecil was present at the terrible and never-to-be-for-
gotten battle between Cheke and Gardiner on the
pronunciation of the Greek epsilon, which convulsed
the academic world.” (See p. 84, et seq.)

The Apostrophe is used to abbreviate a word; as, ’tis for it is, tho’ for though, don’t for do not. It denotes the possessive case; as, “John’s hat,” “three years’ service,” “one hour’s work,” “two days’ notice,” “Smith & Co.’s shops,” “Brook’s book,” “Brooks’s book.” It appears in names; as, O’Brien; M’[Mac]Mahon. {p119}

In French, no space is put after an apostrophe denoting elision; as, “d’or”: in Italian, a space is inserted, as, “n’ arrivi.”

A turned comma sometimes denotes the ac in Mac; as, MDonough.

Two commas (usually turned) are often used instead of do. (ditto).

- Carving knives
- Pocket
- Case

- Book of History.

- ,,  ,, Chemistry.

- ,,  ,, Algebra.

Quotation marks [“ ” or  ”] are used to include a copied passage. If the copied passage itself contains a quotation, the latter is denoted by single marks [‘ ’ or  ’]; as, “My father said in banter, ‘James, the notes are not correct.’ The farmer dryly answered, ‘I dinna ken what they may be noo; but they were a’ richt afore ye had your fingers in amang ’em.’”

In some publications a little labor is saved by using single marks for the principal quotations, and double if there happen to be inserted ones; as in a recent novel by Mrs. Humphrey Ward:

‘To plunge into the Christian period without having first cleared the mind as to what is meant in history and literature by “the critical method” which in history may be defined,’ etc.

The same neat style is used in Max Müller’s Translation of Kant:

What Kant felt in his heart of hearts we know from some remarks found after his death among his papers. ‘It is {p120} dishonorable,’ he writes, ‘to retract or deny one’s real convictions, but silence in a case like my own, is the duty of a subject; and though all we say must be true, it is not our duty to declare publicly all that is true.’—Preface.

Brackets are used to inclose words omitted by a writer or copyist; as, “Were you [on the] deck of the steamer at the [time] of the collision?” (In the Holy Scriptures, supplied words are put in italics: “Because they sought it not by faith, but, as it were, by the works of the law.”) Explanations inserted in text are usually inclosed in brackets; as in the following instance, from “The Life of Dr. Goldsmith”: “You see, my dear Dan, how long I have been talking about myself. [Some mention of private family affairs is here omitted.] My dear sir, these things give me real uneasiness,” etc.

Marks of Parenthesis are used to inclose a sentence, or part of a sentence, which is inserted in another sentence: “One Sunday morning, when her daughter (afterwards Lady Elton) went into the kitchen, she was surprised to find a new jack (recently ordered, and which was constructed on the principle of going constantly without winding up) wholly paralyzed and useless.”

The Index [] is used to draw attention to some particular passage. Sometimes an Asterism [] is used for the same purpose. Where there are many footnotes on a page, the Index is a proper reference mark. {p121}

The Caret [] is used in writing, to denote the point where an interlineation is to be inserted. It is sometimes used in printing when the exact character of a manuscript is to be represented,—as in “exhibits” in law work.

The Brace [] is used to connect a number of words with one common term; and sometimes in poetry, to connect three lines which rhyme together:

Moore’s Works, |
Saurin’s Sermons, | $1.75 each.
Lewis’s Plays,

Injustice, swift, erect, and unconfined, |
Sweeps the wide earth, and tramples o’er mankind,
While prayers, to heal her wrongs, move slow behind.

Marks of Ellipsis or Omission are the dash; as, “Col. Sm—h”: or asterisks; as, “Col. Sm**h”: or, neatest of all, points; as, “Col. Sm . . h.”

Leaders are dots which lead the eye from something on the left of the page, to some connected matter on the right:

- Globe Insurance Co. . . . . . London, Eng.

- Mutual Life In. Co. . . . . . Hartford, Conn.

Accents are the Grave [`], the Acute [´], and the Circumflex [^]: è is read by the copy-holder grave e; é, acute e; ê, circumflex e.

Marks of Quantity are the Long, as over o in “shōw”; the Short, or Breve, as over o in “nŏt”; and the Diæresis, which denotes that the latter of {p122} two vowels is not in the same syllable as the former; as, “zoölogy,” “Antinoüs.”

The Cedilla is a curve line under the letter c, to denote that it has the sound of s; as in “garçon,” “façade.” It appears in words from the French language. Worcester uses it also to denote the soft sounds of g, s, and x; as in “mişle,” “eaģģerate.” Webster uses it only to denote the soft sound of c, as in “min-çing-ly.” We remark here, by the way, that in dividing such words as “bra-cing,” “min-cing,” “convin-cing,” etc., the c should be carried over, thereby preserving its proper sound. For a similar reason divide “enga-ging,” “ra-ging,” etc., on the a. Whether “ma-gis-trate” should follow this rule is a matter of style. There are offices which so divide it, while others divide on the g. We prefer to syllable the word as we have written it,—on the a.

The Spanish ñ has the sound of n in onion; as, “Señor,” “cañon.”

Umlaut (pron. ōōmlowt), as defined by Webster, is the change or modification of a vowel sound, peculiar to the Germanic languages; as in German, Mann, man, Männer or Maenner, men. The name Roelker may also be written Rölker.

¶ denotes the beginning of a paragraph, as may be noticed in the Sacred Scriptures. In proof-reading and in manuscript, it is used to denote where a paragraph or break should be made. {p123}

§ denotes a section; §§, sections; as, Gen. Stat., Chap. IX., § 19, and Chap. X., §§ 20 and 21.

Reference to notes at the bottom of the page (commonly termed footnotes) is usually made by the asterisk, *, the obelisk, or dagger, †; the double obelisk, or double dagger, ‡; the section, §; the parallels, ; the paragraph, ¶; and the index, ;—but a neater mode is to use superiors; as, 1, 2, 3, or a, b, c, commencing with 1 or a on each page where notes occur.

In concluding our chapter on punctuation, we venture to say to our friends at the case, that, in our opinion, no system of pointing can be of uniform and universal application. Men differ as much in style of writing as in personal appearance, and we might as well expect the same robe to fit all forms, as that one set of rules shall nicely apply to the endless diversities of diction.

Other things being equal however, he who has paid most attention to rule will punctuate with the nearest approximation to correctness. With a clear understanding of an author’s meaning, the compositor seldom need go far astray; and if, having done his best, he finds any passage hopelessly involved, or the meaning too subtile to be grasped, he has one safe resource,—and that is, to FOLLOW THE COPY closely and mechanically. Could he have for reference a few pages preceding a doubtful passage, the whole matter might become perfectly clear; but, as that is out of the question, those pages being scattered as {p124} “takes” in other hands, let the compositor adopt the safe course,—FOLLOW COPY,—resting assured that no person whose opinion he need value, could possibly think of finding fault with him for leaving responsibility where it properly belongs.

CHAPTER VI. ORTHOGRAPHY.

Webster defines Orthography as “the art of writing words with the proper letters, according to common usage”; Worcester, as “the art or the mode of spelling words.” They agree in this: that there are some words—two or three thousand, perhaps—whose orthography common usage has not settled. Prefixed to either Dictionary is a list showing in double column the most prevalent methods of spelling words of doubtful orthography; thus:

Abettor | Abetter
Escalade | Scalade
Germane | Germain, German

The first column in the Webster List “presents the orthography recognized in the body of [the] Dictionary as the preferable one, or that in general use.” But “when in this list the word in the first column is followed by or, as ‘Abatis, or Abattis,’ it is implied that the second form is nearly, often quite, in as good use as the first.” When the word in the first column differs in meaning from that in the second, the word in the first is followed by and, as ‘Lunet, and Lunette,’ both words being in use, but applied to different things. {p126}

The orthography in the first column of the Worcester List “is deemed to be well authorized, and in most cases preferable; but with respect to the authority of that in the right-hand column, there is a great diversity. Both orthographies of some of the words are right, the words being differently spelled when used in different senses”; as, “Draught, or Draft,” “Subtle, or Subtile,” etc. Sometimes and is used as the connective; as, “Canvas, and Canvass.” But these double arrangements are of almost no service to the proof-reader or compositor,—for the interchangeable words cannot both be inserted in his work. If he could use the various spellings, it would save the trouble of weighing authorities: we should then have such sentences as these:

The hostler or ostler inveigled or enveigled the horses into the stockade or stoccade. Meanwhile the infantry landed at the jettee or jetty or jetta or jutty, and at once constructed an abatis or abattis or abbatis, as it behooved or behoved them.

Of these various correct spellings, one must be selected to the exclusion of the rest. But there being no common usage, no academy to instruct, and the copy not being uniform, who or what is to guide the printers and proof-readers in making the selection? “For the last eighty years [or more], printers have exercised a general control over English orthography,”—and we, to carry the general control a little farther, propose to set forth for general use one list from Webster’s first column, exhibiting only one single correct spelling, to be used where the Webster style prevails; and a similar list from Worcester’s {p127} first column, to be used where the Worcester style has the precedence. Would there were a Smithsonian Bureau of the English Language, to render two lists unnecessary; and to give one style to Government work,—a style which should have the approval of Congress, and to which all printing done by or for the various Departments of the United States Government should be conformed.

THE WEBSTER LIST.

[From the column which, he says, “presents the orthography recognized in the body of this Dictionary (Wb. Unabridged) as the preferable one, or that in general use.” But since he places in his first column various spellings of the same words,—e. g. under A, Ædile; under E, Edile,—we have, in accordance with our plan, omitted that spelling which we have observed to be neglected by readers who profess to follow Webster. We have inserted in brackets some words from the second column which have a different signification from their congeners in the first; also in brackets, some words from the defining columns, and such remarks and explanations as may be of service to printers and others.]

- A.

- Abatis

- Abettor [One who abets another to commit a crime.]

- Abreuvoir
- Abridgment
- [Accessary As used in law.]

- Accessory [“In its other senses” (than in law); as, “the accessories of a picture.”]

- Account, -ant, etc.
- Accouter, etc.
- Acetimeter
- Ache
- Achieve
- Acknowledgment
- Addible
- Adipocere
- Admittable
- Adopter (Chem.)
- Adulterer, -ess
- Adz
- Ægis
- Æolian
- Aghast
- Agriculturist
- Aid-de-camp
- Ajutage
- Alcaid
- Alchemy
- Alcoran
- Alkahest
- Allege

- Alleluia [If written Halleluiah or Hallelujah, follow copy.]

- Alloy
- Alum
- Almanac
- Ambassador
- Ambergris
- Ambs-ace
- Amend, -ment
- Amice
- Ammoniuret
- Amortize, -ment
- Amphitheater
- Anapest
- Ancient, -ly
- Andiron
- Angiotomy
- Ankle
- Annotto
- Antechamber
- Anterior
- Anti-emetic
- Antihypnotic
- Apostasy

- Aposteme [If written Imposthume, follow copy.]

- Apothegm
- Appall
- Appallment
- [Appanage]
- Appareled, -ing
- Appraise, -ed, etc. {p128}
- Apprise (to notify)
- Apricot
- Arbitrament
- Arbor
- Archæology
- Ardor
- Argol
- Armor, -er, etc.
- Arquebuse
- Arrack
- Artisan
- Asafœtida
- Asbestus
- Ascendant
- Ascendency
- Askance
- Askant
- Assuage

- Atheneum [If written Athenæum, follow copy.]

- Aught
- Author, etc.
- Autocracy
- Autoptical
- Awkward
- Awm
- Ax
- Ay [Expressing assent.]
- Aye [An affirmative vote.]

- B.

- Backshish
- Bade (v.)
- Baldric
- Balister
- Balk
- Baluster
- Bandana
- Bandoleer
- Banderole
- Banyan (Bot.)
- Bans [Notice of proposed marriage.]
- Barbacan
- Barbecue
- Barberry
- Bark
- Barouche
- Barytone
- Basin
- Bass
- Bass-viol
- Bas-relief
- Bastinade
- Baton
- Bateau
- Battledoor
- Bauble
- Bazaar
- Befall
- Behavior
- Behoove
- Beldam
- Belligerent
- Benedict
- Benumb
- Bellfounder, [And similar compounds.]
- Bequeath
- Bergamot
- Berth (Nav.)
- [Bestrown p. p. of Bestrew.]
- Betel
- Beveled, -ing
- Bevile (Her.)
- Bezant
- Biasing, -ed, -es, etc.
- Bigoted
- Bilge
- Billiards
- Billingsgate
- Bin
- Binnacle
- Bister
- Blende (Min.)
- Blessed (a.)
- Blithesome, -ly, etc.
- Blomary
- Blouse
- Bodice
- Boil (n.)
- Bombazet
- Bombazine
- Bonnyclabber
- Bourgeois
- Bourse
- Bouse
- Bousy
- Boweled, -ing, etc.
- Bowlder
- Bowsprit
- Brahmin
- Brake (Railways)
- Brazen
- Brazier
- Brier
- Brooch
- Bryony
- Buccaneer
- Buddhism
- Buffet
- Buhrstone
- Bun
- Buncombe
- Bur [If written Burr, follow copy.]
- Burden, -some
- Burin
- Burned (imp.)
- Burganet
- But-end
- Butt
- Byzantine

C.

Caboose
Cacique
Caddice {p129}
Cæsura
Cag [If written Keg follow copy.]
Caique
Caisson
Calash
Caldron
Calendar
Calends
Caliber
Calipash
Calipee
Calipers
Caliph
Calk
Calligraphy
Caloyer
Caltrap
Calyx
Camlet
Camomile [If written Chamomile, follow copy.]
Camphene
Camphor
Candor
Canceled, -ing, etc.
Cannel-coal
Cannoneer
Canny
Cañon (Sp.)

Canyon [Eng.] [The Eng. form is the better if writing or printing English. Cañon in an English book seems pedantic.]

Cantaloup
Cantalever
Carbine
Carbineer
Carapace
Carat
Caravansary

Carcass [In the King James Bible, spelled carcase.]

Carnelian
Caroled, -ing, etc.
Cartography
Cask (a vessel)
Casque (helmet)
Cassava

Cassimere [If written Kerseymere, follow copy.]

Caster [One who casts; a cruet; a furniture-wheel.]

Castor [A genus of animals; a hat; a drug; a heavy cloth.]

Catchup
Catechise, -er
Cauliflower
Causeway
Caviare
Caviler, -ed, etc.
Cayman
Ceil -ing, -ed
Center
Centered
Centimeter
Centiped
Ceroon
Cess-pool
Chalcedony
Chameleon
Chamois
Champaign [Flat, open country.]
Champagne (wine)
Champerty
Channeled, -ing, etc.
Chant, -er, -ed, etc.

Chap [Both Wb. and Wor. place chăp in the first column, and chop in the second. This preference of chăp to chop harmonizes orthography and pronunciation in three instances: (1) when chăp is v. t., signifying “to cleave or open longitudinally, through the effect of heat, cold, dryness, etc.; as, ‘Heat chăps the russet plain’”; (2) when v. i., as “The hands chăp”; (3) when n., as a cleft in the earth’s surface, or in the hands or feet. Chăp (a youth) was never in doubt; while chaps (the jaws) must continue to be pronounced with the a as in what.]

Chase
Check (n.)
Checker, -ed, etc.
Chemist
Chemistry
Cherif
Chestnut
Chevron
Chilioliter
Chiliometer
Chine
Chintz
Chiseled, -ing
Chock-full
Choir
Chorister
Choke
Choose
Chore
Cigar
Cimeter
Cipher
Clamor, -ous, etc.
Clangor
Clarionet
Clew
Clinch
Clinique
Clinometer
Cloak
Clodpoll {p130}
Clothe, -ed, etc.
Clough
Clyster
Cockswain
Cœliac
Cognizor, -zee
Coif
Coiffure
Colander
Comb [Unwatered part of valley, etc.]
Comfrey
Complete
Complexion

[Comptroller, -ship There is an officer of the U. S. Government whose official title is “Comptroller of the Currency.” The word appears in Wb. 2d column.]

Confectionery
Connection
Contemporary
Contra-dance
Controller, -ship
Control
Cony
Cooly
Coomb (4 bushels)
Copaiva
Copier
Copse
Coquette (n.)
Coranach
Corbel
Cosy
Cot (a hut)
Cot (a bed)
Cotillon
Councilor [A member of a council.]
Counselor [One who gives counsel.]
Count
Courtesan
Courtesy (Law)
Cozen, -age
Craunch
Cray-fish
Creak (v.)
Creosote
Critique
Crosslet
Cruet
Croup [Behind the saddle.]
Crupper
Cruse (bottle)
Cucurbit
Cudgeled, -er, -ing
Cue [Twist of back hair.]
Cuerpo
Cuneiform
Curb (of a well)
Cursed (imperf.)
Curtal-ax
Cutlass
Cyclopedia
Cymar
Cyst
Czar, -ina

- D.

- Dactyl
- Damasken
- Damson
- Dandruff
- Danegelt
- Debarkation
- Debonair, -ly, -ness
- Decrepit
- Defense, -less, etc.
- Deflection
- Deflour
- Delf
- Delphin
- Deltoid
- Demeanor
- Demesne (Law)
- Dentiroster
- Dependent
- Dependence
- Deposit
- Desert (n.)
- Deshabille
- Dessert
- Detecter
- Detortion
- Deuce
- Develop, -ment

- Dexterous [But if written Dextrous follow copy, to avoid subsequent change.]

- Diæresis
- Diarrhea
- Diarrhetic
- Dike
- Diocese
- Disheveled, -ing, etc.
- Disk
- Dispatch, -ed, -ing
- Disseize, -in, -or
- Distention
- Distill
- Distrainor
- Diversely

- Divest, -ed, etc. [But in Law, Devest is commonly used; in law work, follow copy.]

- Docket
- Doctress
- Dolor, -ous
- Domicile
- Doomsday-book
- Dory
- Dormer-window
- Dote
- Dotage
- Doubloon
- Dowry
- Downfall {p131}

- Dram [A weight; a minute quantity; a potation.]

- [Drachm This word is in second column, connected to Dram by and. Its meaning seems to be properly limited, however, to an ancient Greek coin, and a Greek weight (Drachma).]

- Draff

- Draft [1. The act of drawing or pulling as by beasts of burden. 2. Drawing of men for a military corps. 3. An order for payment of money; a bill of exchange. 4. An allowance in weighing. 5. A drawing of lines for a plan; a figure described on paper; delineation; sketch; plan delineated; an outline to be filled in or completed for composition. In any other sense than these five, use the original spelling, Draught.]

- [Draught (See supra.)]
- Dragoman
- Dribblet
- Drier
- Driveler, -ing, etc.
- Drought
- Dryly
- Duchy
- Duchess
- Dueler, -ing, -ist
- Dullness
- Dungeon
- Dunghill
- Duress
- Dye, etc. (color)

- E.

- Eavesdropper
- Eccentric, -al, etc.
- Economy
- Ecstasy
- Ecstatic
- Ecumenic, -al
- Edematous
- Edile, -ship
- Eloign, -ment
- Emarginate
- Embalm, -ed, etc.
- Embalmer, -ment
- Embank, -ed, etc.
- Embargo
- Embark, -ed, etc.
- Embarkation
- Embassy
- Embassage
- Embed, -ded, etc.
- Embezzle
- Emblaze
- Emblazon, -ed, etc.
- Embody, -ied, etc.
- Embolden, -ed, etc.
- Emborder, etc.
- Embosom [If written Imbosom, follow copy.]
- Emboss, -ed, etc.
- Embowel, -ed, -ing
- Emboweler, -ment
- Embower, -ed, etc.
- Embrace, -ed, etc.
- Embracer, -ment
- Embrasure
- Embrocation
- Embroil, -ed, etc.

- Emerods [The Biblical spelling; in ordinary work, Hemorrhoids.]

- Emir
- Empale, -ed, etc.
- Emperor
- Empoison
- Empower, -ed, etc.
- Emprise
- Empurple
- Emu
- Enameled, -ing, etc.
- Enamor, -ed, -ing
- Encage, -ed, etc.
- Encamp, -ed, etc.
- Enchant
- Enchiseled, -ing
- Encloister
- Encounter, etc.
- Encroach, etc.
- Encumber, -ed, etc.
- Encyclopedia
- Endear
- Endeavor, -ed, etc.
- Endow, etc.
- Endue
- Endure, -ance
- Enforce, -ed, etc.
- Engage, -ed, etc.
- Engender
- Engorge, -ed, etc.
- Engross
- Enhance
- Enigma
- Enjoin, etc.
- Enkindle, -ed, etc.
- Enlarge, etc.
- Enlist
- Enroll
- Enrollment
- Enshrine
- Enshroud
- Ensphere
- Enstamp
- Entail (Arch.)
- Entangle, etc.
- Enterprise
- Enthrone, -ed, etc.
- Entire, -ly, etc.
- Entitle, -ed, etc.
- Entrance, -ed, etc.
- Entrap, -ped, etc.
- Entreat, -ed, etc. {p132}
- Entreaty
- Entresol
- Entwine, -ed, etc.
- Envelop (v.)
- Envelope (n.)
- Envelopment
- Envenom
- Eolipile
- Epaulet
- Epauleted, -ing
- Equaled, -ing
- Equiangular
- Equivoque
- Era
- Error, etc.
- Escalade
- Escapement

- Escarp (Fort.) [But if written Scarp, follow copy.]

- Eschalot
- Escheat
- Escritoire
- Escutcheon
- Estafet
- Esthetics
- Estoppel
- Estrich
- Etiology

- Étui [A French word, anglicized as Etwee; follow copy.]

- Exactor
- Expense
- Exsiccate, -ed, -ing, etc.
- Exsiccation
- Exsuccous
- Exudation
- Exude, etc.
- Eyrie

- F.

- Fæces
- Fagot, -ed, -ing
- Fairy
- Fakir
- Falchion
- Falcon, -er, -ry
- Fantasy
- Fantastic
- Farthingale
- Fattener
- Favor, -er, -ed, etc.
- Fecal
- Fecula
- Feldspar
- Felly
- Feoffor
- Fervor
- Fetal
- Feticide
- Fetor
- Fetus
- Feud, -al, -atory
- Feudalize, -ism
- Fie
- Filbert
- Filibuster
- Filigree

- Fillibeg [But if written Filibeg or Phillibeg, follow copy.]

- Finery (a forge)
- Firman
- Fishgig
- Fives [Veterinary]
- Flageolet
- Flavor, -ed, etc.
- Flier
- Floatage (Law)
- Flotsam
- Flour (of grain)

- Flower-de-luce [If French is wanted,—Fleur-de-lis.]

- Fluke (Naut.)
- Fluke (Zoöl.)
- Fogy
- Font (Typog.)
- Forbade
- Foray
- Fosse

- Foundery [Very few writers so spell: if written Foundry, follow copy.]

- Franc (coin)
- Frantic
- Frenzy
- Frieze (Arch.)
- Frouzy
- Frumenty
- Frustum
- Fueled, -ing
- Fulfill, -ment
- Fullness
- Further
- [Farther When space or time is indicated.]
- Furtherance
- Furthermore
- Furthest
- [Farthest When space or time is indicated.]

- Fuse (n.) [In U. S. Govt. work Fuze is the common usage, to distinguish it from the verb to Fuse. Follow copy.]

- Fusil (gun)

- Fusileer

- G.

- Gabardine
- Galiot
- Garish

- Gallias [So spelled in the first column; but in the defining columns of the Dictionary, the s is doubled. Follow copy.]

- Gamboled, -ing

- Gamut {p133}

- Gang (Min.) [If written Gangue, follow copy.]

- Gantlet [A military punishment.]
- Gasteropod
- Gargoyle (Arch.)
- Gauge
- Gault
- Gauntlet [A large glove of mail.]
- Gayety
- Gayly
- Gazelle
- Genet
- Gerfalcon
- Germane
- Germ
- Ghibelline
- Gibe
- Gimbals
- Gimlet
- Girasole
- Girt (v.)
- [Girth (n.)]
- Glair
- Glamour
- Glave
- Gloze
- Gnarled
- Gore
- Good-by
- Good-humor
- Gormand
- Governor
- Graft, -ed
- Grandam
- Granddaughter
- Granite

- Graveled, -ing [The l in graveling should not be doubled.]

- Gray, -ish, etc.
- Grenade
- Grenadier
- Greyhound
- Grewsome
- Griffin
- Grisly [If written Grizzly, follow copy.]
- Groats
- Grogram
- Grommet
- Grotesque, -ly
- Groundsel
- Groveler, -ing
- Group (v.)

- Guaranty [If written Guarantee, follow copy.]

- Guelder-rose
- Guelf [If written Guelph, follow copy.]
- Guerrilla
- Guilder (coin)
- Guillotine
- Gulf
- Gunwale
- Gurnard
- Gypsy
- Gyrfalcon
- Gyves

- H.

- Hackle
- Hagbut
- Haggard
- Haggess
- Ha-ha
- Haik
- Hake
- Halberd
- Halibut

- Hallelujah [But if written Alleluia, or Halleluiah, follow copy, to avoid “correcting.”]

- Halloo
- Halidom
- Halyard
- Handicraft
- Handiwork
- Handsome
- Handsel
- Handseled
- Harbor, -ed, etc.
- Harebell
- Harebrained
- Harem
- Haricot
- Harrier
- Harry
- Haslet
- Hasheesh
- Hatti-sherif
- Haulm
- Haul
- Haunch
- Hautboy
- Hawser
- Headache
- Hearse
- Hectoliter
- Hectometer
- Hegira
- Height, -en, etc.
- Heinous, -ly, -ness
- Hematite
- Hematology
- Hemistich
- Hemorrhoids
- Heretoch
- Hermit, -age
- Herpetology
- Hexahedron
- Hibernate
- Hiccough

- Hinderance [If written Hindrance, follow copy. See remark under Foundery, in loco.]

- Hindoo, -ism
- Hip (Pom.)
- Hipped-roof {p134}
- Hippogriff
- Hippocras
- Ho
- Hoarhound
- Hockey
- Hodge-podge
- Hoiden, -ish
- Holiday [If written Holyday, follow copy.]
- Hollo
- Holster
- Hominy
- Homeopathy
- Homonym
- Honeyed
- Honor, -ed, etc.
- Hoop (v.)
- Hoopoe
- Hornblende
- Horror
- Hostelry
- Hostler
- Hough
- Housewife
- Howdah
- Howlet
- Hummock
- Humor
- Hurra
- Hydrangea
- Hypæthral
- Hyperstene
- Hypotenuse
- Hyssop

- I.

- Icicle
- Illness
- Imbibe
- Imbitter
- Imbrue
- Imbue, -ed, -ing
- Immarginate

- Impanel, -ed, -ing [Wb. has also Empaneled, -ing, etc., in his first column under E. One way is enough; but to avoid changes in author’s proof, compositor had better follow copy.]

- Imparlance
- Impassion
- Impeach
- Imperiled
- Implead
- Imposthume [See Aposteme.]
- Impoverish
- Imprint
- Incase
- Inclasp
- Inclose, -ure, etc.
- Increase
- Incrust

- Incumbrance [But Wb. prefers Encumber for the verb.]

- Indefeasible
- Indelible
- Indict (Law)
- Indictment
- Indite, -er
- Indocile
- Indoctrinate
- Indorse, -ed, -ing
- Indorser, -ment
- Induce, -ment
- Inferior
- Inferable
- Inflection
- Infold
- Infoliate
- Ingraft, -er, -ment
- Ingrain
- Ingulf
- Inkle
- Innuendo
- Inquire, -er, -y, etc.
- Inscribe
- Inscroll
- Insnare
- Install
- Installment
- Instate
- Instill
- Instructor
- Insure, -ed, -ing
- Insurer, -ance
- Intenable
- Intercessor
- Interior
- Inthrall
- Intrench
- Intrust
- Inure
- Inurement
- Inveigle
- Inventor
- Inwheel
- Inwrap
- Inwreathe
- Isocheimal
- Ixolite

- J.

- Jacobin
- Jaconet
- Jail, -er, etc.
- Jalap
- Jam (Min.)
- Janizary
- Jasmine
- Jaunt, -y, -ily
- Jean
- Jenneting
- Jeremiad
- Jetsam
- Jetty
- Jeweled
- Jewelry
- Jointress
- Jonquil
- Jostle
- Jowl {p135}
- Judgment
- Jupon
- Just [A mock encounter on horseback.]

- K.

- Kaffer
- Kale
- Kayle
- Keelhaul
- Keelson
- Keg
- Kenneled, -ing
- Khan
- Kiln (n.)
- Kilogram
- Kiloliter
- Kilometer
- Knob
- Koran
- Kyanite

- L.

- Labeled, -ing
- Labor, -ed, -ing, etc.
- Lachrymal
- Lac (coin)
- Lackey
- Lacquer (n.)
- Lacquer, -ed, -ing
- Lagoon
- Lambdoidal
- Landau
- Landscape
- Lantern
- Lanyard
- Lapsided
- Larum
- Launch
- Leaven
- Lecher, -y, -ous
- Lecturn

- Ledgement [Sic; the retention of e after g seems somewhat remarkable.]

- Ledger
- Leger-line
- Leggin
- Lemming
- Lettuce
- Leveled, -ing, -er
- Libeled, -ing, etc.
- License
- Lickerish
- Licorice
- Lief
- Lilac
- Linguiform
- Linnæan
- Linseed
- Linstock
- Liter
- Lithontriptic
- Llama (Zoöl.)
- Loadstar, -stone
- Loath (a.)
- Lode (Min.)
- Lodgment
- Logogriph
- Longiroster
- Louver
- Lower
- Luff

- Lunet [A little moon, or satellite. Obsolete.]

- Lunette [A detached bastion, etc.]
- Lunge
- Lustring
- Lye

- M.

- Macaw
- Maccaboy
- Maggoty
- Maim [Mayhem, Law.]

- Mal (prefix) [Here, in Wb., first column, appears “Mall,” followed by “or Maul”; but, since Maul also appears in first column, both as noun and verb, we omit Mall, as not preferable to Maul.]

- Malkin
- Mamaluke
- Mamma
- Mandatary (n.)
- Manikin
- Maneuver
- Mantel (Arch.)
- Mantel-piece
- Marc (coin)
- Magaron
- Marquee
- Marque (letter of)

- Marquess [Till of late, marquis was the usual spelling, but it is now to a great extent superseded by marquess, except in the foreign title.—Smart.]

- Marshal
- Marshaled, -ing
- Martin (Ornith.)
- Martinet (Naut.)
- Martingale
- Marveled, -ing, etc.
- Mark
- Maslin
- Mastic
- Matrice [If written Matrix, follow copy.]
- Mattress
- Mauger
- Maul (n. and v.)
- Mayhem (Law)
- Meager, -ly, etc.
- Merchandise {p136}
- Meter
- Mileage
- Milleped
- Milligram
- Milliliter
- Millimeter
- Milrea
- Misbehavior
- Miscall
- Misdemeanor
- Misspell
- Misspend
- Misspent
- Misstate
- Mistletoe
- Miter, -ed
- Mizzen
- Mizzle
- Moccasin
- Mode (Gram.)
- Mocha-stone
- Modeled, -ing
- Modillion
- Mohammedan
- Mohawk
- Molasses
- Mold
- Molt
- Moneyed
- Mongrel
- Moresque
- Morris
- Mortgageor (Law)
- Mortgager
- Mosque
- Mosquito
- Mullein
- Multiped
- Mummery
- Murder, etc.
- Murky
- Murrhine
- Muscadel

- Muscle (a shell fish) [If written Mussel, follow copy.]

- Musket

- Mustache

- N.

- Nankeen
- Narwal
- Naught
- Negotiate, -or, etc.
- Neighbor, -ing, etc.
- Net (a.)
- Neb (Orn.)
- Niter
- Nobless [If written Noblesse, follow copy.]
- Nomads
- Nombles
- Nonesuch
- Novitiate
- Nylghau

- O.

- Oaf
- Ocher
- Octahedron
- Octostyle
- Odalisque
- Odor
- Offense
- Olio
- Omber
- Omer
- Oolong
- Opaque
- Opobalsam
- Orach
- Orang-outang
- Orchestra
- Oriel
- Oriflamb
- Orison
- Osier
- Osprey
- Otolite
- Ottar (of roses)
- Outrageous
- Oxide
- Oyes

- P.

- Packet
- Painim
- Palanquin
- Palestra
- Palet
- Palmiped
- Panada
- Pander
- Pandore
- Pandour
- Panel (Law)
- Paneled, -ing
- Pantograph
- Papoose
- Paralyze
- Parceled, -ing
- Parcenary
- Parlor
- Parol (a.)
- Parquet
- Parsnip
- Parrakeet
- Partible
- Partisan
- Pasha
- Pashalic
- Pask
- Patrol (n.)
- Paver
- Pawl

- [Peaked We insert this word as of the first column, because Picked (in Wb. first col.) has definitions not applicable to Peaked.]

- Pean
- Peart {p137}
- Pedicel
- Peddler
- Pedobaptist
- Pemmican
- Penciled, -ing
- Pennant
- Pentahedral
- Peony
- Periled, -ing
- Peroxide
- Persimmon
- Persistence
- Pewit (Orn.)
- Phantasm
- Phantom
- Phenomenon
- Phenix
- Phial [But if written Vial, follow copy.]
- Philter, -ed
- Phthisic
- Piaster
- Picked
- Picket
- Pie
- Piebald
- Piepoudre
- Pimento
- Pimpernel
- Pinchers
- Pistoled, -ing
- Placard
- Plaice (Ichth.)
- Plain [Plane, in some senses.]
- Plane-sailing
- Plaster
- Plait (v.)
- Plat (n.)
- Plethron
- Pliers
- Plow
- Plumber
- Plumiped
- Pluviometer
- Point-device
- Poise
- Polacca
- Pole-ax
- Poltroon
- Polyhedron, -drous
- Polyglot (n.)
- Polyp
- Pommel
- Pommeled, -ing
- Ponton
- Pony
- Poniard
- Porgy (Ichth.)
- Porpoise
- Portray
- Porteress
- Possessor
- Postilion
- Potato
- Potsherd
- Powter (Orn.)
- Pozzolana
- Practice (v.)
- Præmunire
- Prænomen
- Predial
- Premise
- Pretense
- Pretermit
- Pretor
- Profane
- Protector
- Programme
- Protoxide
- Prunella
- Pumpkin
- Puppet
- Purblind
- Purr
- Purslane
- Putrefy
- Pygmy
- Pyx

- Q.

- Quadroon
- Quarantine
- Quarrel (an arrow)
- Quarreled, -ing
- Quartet
- Quaterfoil
- Quay, -age
- Questor
- Quinsy
- Quintain
- Quintet
- Quoin

- R.

- Rabbet (Carp.)
- Rabbi
- Raccoon
- Raddock (Orn.)
- Ramadan
- Rancor, -ous, -ly
- Ransom
- Rare (adj.)
- Rarefy
- Raspberry
- Rattan
- Raveled, -ing
- Raven (plunder)
- Raze, -ed, -ing
- Rasure
- Real (coin)
- Rearward
- Recall
- Recompense
- Reconnoiter
- Redoubt
- Referable
- Reflection
- Reglet
- Reindeer
- Re-enforce
- Re-install, -ment
- Relic
- Remiped {p138}
- Renard
- Rencounter
- Rennet
- Replier
- Reposit
- Resin

- Rosin [The resin left, after distilling off the volatile oils from the different species of turpentine.]

- Resistance, etc.
- Restive, -ly, -ness
- Retch (to vomit)
- Reveled, -ing, -er
- Reverie
- Ribbon
- Reversible
- Rigor, -ous, etc.
- Risk
- Rivaled, -ing
- Riveted, -ing
- Roc (Orn.)
- Rodomontade
- Rondeau
- Ronyon
- Roquelaure
- Rotunda
- Route
- Ruble (coin)
- Ruche
- Rummage
- Rumor, etc.
- Rye

S.

Sabian
Saber, -ed, etc.
Sackbut
Sainfoin
Salam
Salep
Salic
Saltpeter
Samester
Sandaled
Sandarac
Sandever
Sanskrit
Sapajo
Sapodilla
Sarcenet
Sat
Satchel
Satinet
Sauer-kraut
Savanna
Savior

[Saviour We insert this as of first column, it being in universal use when referring to Christ.]

Savor
Scallop, -ed, -ing
Scath
Scepter, -ed

Scherif [Preferring this form to Cherif, we insert it here. Both spellings appear in Wb. first column.]

Schist
Schorl
Sciagraphy
Scion
Scirrhosity
Scirrhus
Scissors
Sconce
Scot-free
Scow
Scrawny
Scythe
Seamstress
Sear
Secretaryship
Sedlitz
Seethe
Seignior
Seigniorage, -ory.
Seine
Seizin
Seleniuret
Sellender
Selvage
Sentinel
Sentry
Sepawn
Sepulcher
Sequin
Sergeant
Set (n.)
Sevennight
Shad
Shah
Shawm
Shampoo
Shard
Sheathe (v.)
Sheik
Sherbet
Sherry

Shill-I-shall-I [But if written Shilly-shally, follow copy.]

Shore (n.)
Shorl
Shoveled, -er, -ing
Show
Shrillness
Shriveled, -ing
Shuttlecock
Shyly, -ness
Sibyl
Sidewise
Silicious
Sillabub
Simoom
Siphon
Siren
Sirloin
Sirup
Sizar
Skein
Skeptic
Skillful, -ly, -ness
Skill-less
Skull (cranium) {p139}
Slabber
Sleight
Slyly, -ness
Smallness
Smolder
Smooth (v. and a.)
Snapped (imp.)
Sniveler, -ing
Socage
Socle
Solan-goose (n.)
Solder, etc.
Soliped
Solvable
Somber
Somersault
Sonneteer
Soothe (v.)
[Sorel]
Sorrel
Souchong
Spa
Spelt (n.)
Specter
Spew
Spinach
Spinel

Spiritous [Spirituous is the more common form. Follow copy.]

Spite
Splendor
Sponge
Sprite
Spirt
Spunk
Staddle
Stanch
Stationery (n.)
Steadfast
Steelyard
Stillness
Stockade
Story (a floor)
Strait (n.)
Strengthener
Strew
Strop (n.)
Stupefy
Sty
Style
Styptic
Subpœna
Subtile (thin)
Subtle (artful)
Successor
Succor
Suite
Suitor
Sulphureted
Sumac
Superior
Suretyship
Surname
Surprise, etc.
Survivor, -ship
Swainmote
Swale (v.)
Swap
Swart (adj.)
Swathe (bandage)
Swiple

Swob, -ber, etc. [But if written Swab, Swabber, etc., follow copy.]

Swollen
Syenite
Symploce
Synonym
Syphilis

- T.

- Tabard
- Tabbinet
- Tabor, etc.
- Taffeta [If written Taffety, follow copy.]
- Taffrail
- Tailage
- Talc
- Tallness
- Tambour
- Tambourine
- Tarantula
- Tarpaulin
- Tasseled, -ing
- Tasses
- Taut (Nav.)
- Tawny
- Tease
- Teasel
- Teetotal
- Tenable
- Tenor
- Tenuirosters
- Terror
- Tetrahedron
- Tetrastich
- Theater
- Thole
- Thorp
- Thralldom
- Thrash
- Threshold
- Throe (n.)
- Ticking (n.)
- Tidbit
- Tie (n. and v.)
- Tier
- Tierce
- Tiger
- Tincal
- Tithe
- Toll (v. t.)
- Tollbooth
- Ton (the weight)
- [Tun (the cask)]
- Tonnage
- Tormentor
- Tourmaline
- Toweling
- Trammeled, -ing
- Tranquilize
- Transferable
- Transference {p140}
- Transship, -ment
- Trapan (a snare)
- Traveler, -ed, -ing
- Traverse
- Travesty
- Treadle
- Trebuchet
- Treenail
- Trestle
- Trigger
- Trevet
- Tricolor
- Trihedral
- Trod
- Trousers
- Troweled
- Truckle-bed
- Tryst
- Tumbrel
- Tumor
- Tunneled, -ing
- Turquois
- Turnip
- Turnsole
- Tutenag
- Tweedle
- Twibil
- Tymbal
- Tyro

- U.

- Umber
- Unbiased
- Unboweled [And others of the same class.]
- Unroll
- Until

- V.

- Vaivode [If written Waiwode or Wayvode, follow copy.]

- Valise
- Valor, -ous, -ously
- Vantbrace
- Vapor
- Vat
- Veil
- Vedette

- Vender [But Vendor, as correlative of Vendee.]

- Venomous
- Veranda
- Verderer
- Verdigris
- Vermin
- Verst
- Vertebra
- Vervain
- Vicious, -ly, -ness
- Victualed, -er, -ing
- Vigor, -ous, etc.

- Villain [But in feudal law, often spelled Villein, follow copy.]

- Villainy, -ous
- Vise
- Visitor
- Visor
- Vitiate
- Vizier
- Volcano

- W.

- Wadsett
- Wagon
- Waive
- Wale (n.)
- Walrus
- Warranter [In law, Warrantor.]
- Warrior
- Warwhoop
- Waucht
- Waul (as a cat)
- Wear (v. Naut.)
- Wear (n.)
- Weasand
- Welsh
- Whang
- Whelk (n.)
- Whippletree
- Whippoorwill
- Whisky
- Whoop

- Whooping-cough [If written Hooping-cough, be careful to follow copy. We have known some trouble to be caused by a change of the initial in alphabetical tabular work from hospitals, ships, etc.]

- Whortleberry
- Widgeon
- Willful, -ly, -ness
- Windlass
- Wintery [If written Wintry, follow copy.]
- Wiry
- Witch-elm
- Witch-hazel
- Withe
- Wivern
- Wizard
- Wizen
- Woe
- Woful
- Wondrous
- Woodbine
- Woolen, -ette.
- Worshiper, -ed, etc.
- Wrack (to rack)
- Wye [If written Y, follow copy.]

- Y.

- Yataghan
- Yaup
- Yawl (n.)
- Yelk
- Yttria, -um

- Z.

- Zaffer
- Zinc
- Zinciferous
- Zonnar
- Zymometer

THE WORCESTER LIST.

[The following vocabulary exhibits the orthography apparently deemed preferable by Worcester. It will, we believe, be found very convenient in offices where the Worcester style is in favor,—as the preceding list will prove to be where the Webster style is in vogue. Any remarks which we have inserted, and a few additional words, are in brackets.]

- A.

- Aam
- Abatis
- Abbey

- Abetter [In a good sense; nearly or quite obsolete.]

- Abettor [Law. One who abets an unlawful act.]

- Abnormal
- Abreuvoir
- Abridgment
- Accessary [When used in Law.]
- Accessory (Art.)
- Accountant
- Acetimeter
- Ache
- Achieve
- Acknowledgment
- Acronycal
- Addible
- Adipocere
- Adjudgment
- Admittible

- Adopter [One who adopts, or assumes as one’s own.]

- [Adapter Tube used in Chemistry.]
- Adscititious
- Adulteress
- Advertise
- Advoutry
- Advowee
- Advowson
- Adze
- Æolic
- Affector
- Affeer
- Affiliate
- Affiliation
- Afraid
- Aghast
- Agriculturist
- Aide-de-camp
- Aisle (church)
- Ajutage
- Alchemical
- Alchemist
- Alchemy
- Alcoran
- Alexipharmic
- Alkahest
- Alkali
- Allege
- Allocution
- Alloy
- Almacantar
- Almanac
- Almonry
- Alnager
- Alum
- Amassment
- Ambassador
- Ambergris
- Ambs-ace
- Amercement
- Amiability
- Amice
- Amortise
- Anademe
- Ananas
- Anapest
- Anapestic
- Anbury
- Ancestral
- Ancient
- Ancientry
- Andiron
- Anemone
- Angiography
- Angiology
- Angiotomy
- Ankle
- Annotto
- Antechamber
- Antelope
- Antiemetic
- Apanage
- Apostasy

- Aposteme [If written Imposthume, follow copy.]

- Apothegm
- Appall
- Appalment
- Appraise
- Appraisement
- Appraiser
- Apprise
- Appurtenance
- Apricot
- Arbitrament
- Archæological
- Archæology
- Archduchess
- Archil
- Argol
- Arquebuse
- Arrack
- Artisan
- Arvel {p142}
- Asbestos
- Ascendency
- Ascendent
- Askance
- Askant
- Askew
- Assafœtida
- Assize
- Assizer
- Assuage
- Athenæum
- Auger
- [Augur A soothsayer.]
- Aught
- Autocracy
- Avoirdupois
- Awkward
- Awn
- Axe

- B.

- Baccalaureate
- Bachelor
- Bade, from bid
- Balance
- Baldrick
- Balk
- Ballister
- Baluster
- Bandanna
- Bandoleer
- Bandore
- Bandrol
- Banian
- Banns
- Barbacan
- Barbecue
- Barberry
- Bark
- Barouche
- Baryta
- Barytone
- Basin
- Bass (Mus.)
- Bass-viol
- Bastinado
- Bateau
- Battledoor
- Bawble
- Bazaar
- Beadle
- Beaver
- Befall
- Behoove
- Bellflower
- Belligerent
- Bellman
- Bellmetal
- Bellwether
- Benumb
- Bequeath
- Bergamot
- Bergander
- Berth (in ship)
- Bestrew
- [Bestrewn p. p. of Bestrew.]
- Betel
- Bevel
- Bezant
- Biassed
- Biestings
- Bigoted
- Bilge
- Billiards
- Billingsgate
- Binnacle
- Bistre
- Bivouac
- Bizantine
- Blanch
- Blende (Min.)
- Blithely
- Blitheness
- Blithesome
- Blomary
- Blouse
- Bodice
- Boil (a tumor)
- Bolt
- Bombard
- Bombast
- Bombazette
- Bombazine
- Borage
- Bourgeois
- Bourn
- Bourse
- Bouse
- Bousy
- Bowlder
- Bowsprit
- Brakeman
- Bramin
- Brawl
- Brazen
- Brazier
- Brazil
- Brier
- Brokerage
- Bronze
- Brooch
- Brunette
- Bryony
- Buccaneer
- Buffalo
- Buhrstone
- Bulimy
- Bumblebee
- Bunn
- Bunyon
- Burden
- Burdensome
- Burganet
- Burin
- Burlesque
- Burr
- Buzz
- By (n.)

C.

Cabob
Cacique
Cæsura
Calcareous
Caldron {p143}
Calendar
Calends
Caliber (Gun)

[Calibre Generally so spelled when used in a figurative sense; as “a mind of inferior calibre”; and in this sense retains the French pron. Ka·le·bur.]

Calipers
Caliph
Calk
Calligraphy
Calotte
Caloyer
Caltrop
Calyx
Cameo
Camlet
Camomile [If written Chamomile, follow copy.]
Camphor
Cannel (-coal)
Cannoneer
Canoe
Cantilever
Canvas
[Canvass]
Capriole
Car
Carabine
Carabineer
Carat
Caravansary
Caravel
Caraway
[Carcase Scripture.]
Carcass
Carle
Carnelian
Carolytic
Cartel
Cartridge
Cassada

Cassimere [If spelled Kerseymere, follow copy.]

Cassowary
[Cast]
Caste, class
Castellan

Caster [One who casts; a cruet; a furniture-wheel.]

[Castor A genus of animals; a hat; a drug.]
Castlery
Castrel
Catchpoll
Catchup
Catechise
Catherine
Cauliflower
Causeway
Cavazion (Arch.)
Caviare
Caw
Cayman
Cedilla
Ceiling
Celt
Celtic
Centiped
Cess
Chalcedony
Chaldron
Chalice
Chameleon
Chamois

Champaign [Flat, open country,—Deut. 11 : 30.]

[Champagne, wine]
Champerty
Chant

Chap [See remark on this word, in Wb. List, ante.]

Chaps

Char [A small job. So spelled in England, and in Departments at Washington, where “charwomen” are employed. But—

Chore Is the common orthography in the United States,—and if so written, follow copy.]

Chase
Chastely
Chasteness
Check
Checker
Cheer
Chemical
Chemist
Chemistry
Chestnut
Chiliahedron
Chillness
Chimb
Chintz
Chloride
Choir
Choke
Choose
Chorister
Chyle
Chylifactive
Cider
Cigar
Cimeter
Cipher
Clam (v.)
Clarinet
Cleat
Clew
Clinch
Cloak
Clodpoll
Cloff
Clothe
Clothes {p144}
Cluck
Clyster
Cobbler
Cocoa
Coddle
Cœliac
Coif
Coiffure
Coke
Colander
Colic
College
Colliery
Colter
Comfrey
Commandery
Commissariat
Compatible
Complete
Concordat
Confectionery
Confidant (n.)
Congealable
Connection
Connective
Consecrator
Contemporary
Contra-dance
Contributory
Control
Controllable
Controller
[Comptroller 2d column. See Wb. list.]
Conversable
Cony
Cony-burrow
Coomb (4 bushels)
Copier
Coping
Copse
Coquette (n.)
Coranach
Corbel
Cordovan
Corpse
Correlative
Cosey
Cot
Cotillon
Counsellor [One who gives advice.]
[Councillor A member of a council.]
Courant
Courtesan
Courtesy
[Curtesy (Law)]
Covin
Covinous
Cozen
Cozenage
Craunch
Crawfish
Creak (v.)
Crier
Croslet
Crowd
Crowfoot
Cruet
Crumb
Crusade
Cruse (cruet)
Crystal
Cucurbit
Cue
Cuerpo
Cuish
Cuneiform
Cupel
Curb
Curb-stone
Curtain
Cutlass
Cyclopædia
Cyst
Cysted
Czar

- D.

- Dactyl
- Daily
- Daisied
- Damaskeen (v.)
- Damson
- Dandruff
- Danegelt
- Daub
- Dawdle
- Dearn
- Debarkation
- Debonair
- Decoy
- Decrepit
- Defence
- Defier
- Deflection
- Deflour
- Delft
- Delphine
- Deltoid
- Demesne
- Demarcation
- Democrat
- Denizen
- Dependant (n.)
- Dependence
- Dependent (a.)
- Deposit
- Desert (n.)
- Desolater

- Despatch [Dispatch also appears in Wor. 1st column. Follow copy.]

- Dessert (n.)
- Detecter
- Detorsion
- Detractor
- Develop
- Development
- Devest

- Dexterous [If written Dextrous follow copy.]

- Diadron {p145}
- Diæresis
- Diarrhœa
- Dike
- Dime
- Diocese
- Disburden
- Discount
- Disfranchise
- Disfranchisement
- Dishabille
- Disinthrall
- Disk
- Disseize
- Disseizin
- Disseizor
- Dissolvable
- Distention
- Distil
- Distrainor
- Diversely
- Divest
- Docket
- Doctress
- Dodecahedron
- Doggerel
- Domicile
- Doomsday-book
- Dory
- Dote
- Doubloon
- Dowry
- Downfall

- Drachm [Properly limited to the Greek coin or weight.]

- Dram [A denomination in apothecaries’ and avoirdupois weight; a small quantity; a potation.]

- Dragoman

- Draught [This, the original and proper orthography, should be retained in all senses other than the five mentioned under Draft.]

- Draft [1. Act of drawing or pulling. 2. A body of men drawn for or from a military organization. 3. An order by which one person draws on another for money; also the money so drawn. 4. An allowance in weighing. 5. The drawing of lines for a plan; the plan so drawn.]

- Dreadnaught
- Driblet
- Drier
- Drought
- Dryly
- Dryness
- Duchess
- Duchy
- Dulness
- Dungeon
- Dunghill
- Duress
- Dye (color)
- Dyeing (coloring)

- E.

- Eavesdropper
- Eccentric
- Echelon
- Economics
- Ecstasy
- Ecstatic
- Ecumenical
- Edile
- Eke
- Embalm
- Embank
- Embankment
- Embargo
- Embark
- Embarkation
- Embase
- Embassy
- Embed
- Embedded
- Embezzle
- Embezzlement
- Emblazon
- Embody
- Embolden
- Emborder
- Embosk
- Embosom
- Emboss
- Embowel
- Embower
- Embrasure
- Empale

- Empanel [This orthography is recommended. (Wb. has Empaneled in first column.) There are so many correct ways of spelling this word, that a man who would get it wrong should be very ingenious.]

- Empoison
- Empower
- Empress
- Encage
- Encenia
- Enchant
- Enchase
- Encircle
- Encroach
- Encumber
- Encumbrance
- Encyclopædia
- Endamage
- Endear
- Endow
- Endue
- Enfeeble
- Enfeoff
- Enfranchise
- Engender
- Engorge {p146}
- Enhance
- Enigma
- Enjoin
- Enlard
- Enlarge
- Enlighten
- Enlist
- Enlumine
- Enroll
- Enrolment
- Enshrine
- Entail
- Entangle
- Enterprise
- Enthrone
- Enthymeme
- Entice
- Entire
- Entirety
- Entitle
- Entomb
- Entrance (v.)
- Entrap
- Entreat
- Envelop (v.)
- Envelopment
- Eolipile
- Epaulet
- Epigraph
- Equerry
- Equiangular
- Equivoke
- Era
- Eremite
- Escalade
- Eschalot
- Escritoire
- Escutcheon
- Estafette
- [Esthetic]
- Esthetics
- Estoppel
- Etiology
- Exactor
- Expense
- Exsanguious
- Exsect
- Exsiccate
- Exsiccation
- Exsiccative
- Exsuccous
- Extrinsical
- Exudation
- Exude
- Eyry

- F.

- Fæces
- Fagot
- Fairy
- Fakir
- Falchion
- Falcon
- Fantasy
- Farther

- Farthest [Present tendency is, to employ farther and farthest in indicating space or time; in other senses, further and furthest.]

- Farthingale
- Fattener
- Fearnaught
- Fecal
- Felly
- Felon
- Felspar
- Ferrule

- [Ferule This word is in second column; but as its signification is wholly distinct from ferrule, it should have place here.]

- Feud
- Feudal
- Feudality
- Feudatory
- Feuillemorte
- Fie
- Filanders
- Filbert
- Filigrane
- Filigree
- Fillibeg
- Filly
- Finery (a forge)
- Firman
- Fizgig
- Flageolet
- Fleam
- Flier
- Flotage
- Flotsam
- Flour (meal)
- Fleur-de-lis
- Flugelman
- Fluke
- Fluoride
- Fœtus
- Forestall
- Foretell
- Forray
- Forte (strong side)
- Fosse

- Foundery [But if written Foundry, follow copy.]

- Franc (coin)
- Frenetic
- Frenzy
- Frieze
- Frigate
- Frit
- Frizzle
- Frowzy
- Frumentaceous
- Frumenty
- Frustum
- Fuel
- Fulfil
- Fulfilment
- Fulness
- Furlough
- Further
- Furthest [See Farthest.] {p147}
- Fusee
- Fusileer
- Fuze (n.)

- G.

- Gabardine
- Galiot
- Gallipot
- Galoche
- Gamut
- Gangue (in ore)
- Gantlet [A military punishment.]
- Garish
- Garreteer
- Gauge
- Gauger
- Gault
- Gauntlet (glove)
- Gayety
- Gayly
- Gazelle
- Gear
- Gelatine
- Genet
- Gerfalcon
- Germ
- Ghastly
- Ghibelline
- Ghyll (ravine)
- Gibberish
- Gibe
- Giglot
- Gimlet
- Gimmal
- Girasole
- Girth
- Glair
- Glave
- Glazier
- Glede
- Gloar
- Gloze
- Glue
- Gluey
- Gnarled
- Gneiss
- Good-by
- Gore
- Gourmand
- Gormandize
- Governante
- Graft
- Grandam
- Granddaughter
- Granite
- Grasshopper
- Gray
- Greeze (a step)
- Grenade
- Grenadier
- Greyhound
- Griffin
- Grizzled
- Grocer
- Grogram
- Grotesque
- Groundsill
- Group
- Guarantee
- Guild
- Guilder (coin)
- Guillotine
- Gulf
- Gunwale
- Gurnet
- Gypsy
- Gyre
- Gyve

- H.

- Haggard
- Haggess
- Ha-ha
- Hake
- Halberd
- Hale (healthy)
- Halibut
- Halyards
- Halloo
- Hame
- Handicraftsman
- Handiwork
- Hards
- Harebell
- Harebrained
- Harem
- Harrier
- Harslet
- Hatchel
- Haul (to drag)
- Haum
- Haunch
- Haust (cough)
- Hautboy
- Havoc
- Hawser
- Hazel
- Headache
- Hearse
- Heartache
- Height
- Heighten
- Heinous
- Hemistich
- Hemorrhoids
- Heptamerede
- Herpetology
- Hexahedron
- Hibernate
- Hibernation
- Hiccough

- Hinderance [If written Hindrance, follow copy. In one of the largest printing-offices in the world, an effort was made a few years since to get the e into Dexterous, Foundery, and Hinderance (style of Wb. and Wor.); but so much trouble ensued,—presumably from outside orthographers,—that compositors and proof-readers were erelong instructed to leave the e out. Follow copy.] {p148}

- Hip (v).
- Hip (n).
- Hippocras
- Hodge-podge
- Hoiden
- Holiday
- Holster
- Hominy
- Homonyme
- Hone
- Honeyed
- Hoot
- Horde
- Horehound
- Hornblende
- Hostler
- Household
- Housewife
- Howlet
- Hub
- Hurrah
- Hydrangea
- Hypothenuse

- I.

- Icicle
- Illness
- Imbitter
- Imbound
- Imbox
- Imbrue
- Impair
- Imparlance
- Impassion
- Implead

- Imposthume [“This seems . . . to have been written erroneously for aposteme.”—Johnson. Follow copy, whether spelled aposteme, apostume, impostem, imposthume, or impostume,—any other orthography might possibly be incorrect.]

- Impoverish
- Incase
- Inclasp
- Incloister
- Inclose
- Inclosure
- Incondensable
- Increase
- Incrust
- Indefeasible
- Indelible
- Indict
- Indictment
- Indite
- Inditer
- Indocile
- Indorsable
- Indorse
- Indorsement
- Indorser
- Inferrible
- Inflection
- Infold
- Infoliate
- Ingraft
- Ingraftment
- Ingrain
- Ingulf
- Innuendo
- Inquire
- Inquirer
- Inquiry
- Insnare
- Install
- Instalment
- Instil
- Instructor
- Insurance
- Insure
- Insurer
- Intenable
- Interlace
- Interplead
- Interpleader
- Inthrall
- Intrinsical
- Intrust
- Intwine
- Inure
- Inurement
- Invalid (n.)
- Inveigle
- Inventor
- Inwheel
- Inwrap
- Inwreathe
- Isle

- J.

- Jackal
- Jacobin
- Jag
- Jagghery
- Jail
- Jailer
- Jalap
- Jamb (n.)
- Janizary
- Janty
- Jasmine
- Jaunt
- Jelly
- Jenneting
- Jetty

- Jewellery [Thus in 1st column, as “the more regularly formed word”; but jewelry is the more common. Follow copy.]

- Jiffy
- Jingle
- Jointress
- Jole [If written jowl, follow copy.]
- Jonquille
- Judgment
- Julep
- Junket
- Just (n.)

- Justle [If written jostle, compositor and proof-reader had better follow copy, to save the trouble and expense of correcting.] {p149}

- K.

- Kale
- Kamsin
- Kayle
- Keelhaul
- Keelson
- Keg
- Khan
- Knapsack
- Knell

- L.

- Lackey
- Lacquer
- Lair
- Lambdoidal
- Lance
- Landscape
- Landsman
- Lantern
- Lanyard
- Launch
- Laundress
- Laureate
- Lavender
- Lea (a plain)
- Leach
- Leaven
- Ledger
- Lettuce
- License
- Lickerish
- Licorice
- Lief
- Lilac
- Lily
- Linguiform
- Liniment [An embrocation.]
- [Linament (Lint, etc.)]
- Lintstock
- Litharge
- Llama (animal)
- Loadstar
- Loadstone
- Loath (a.)
- Loathe (v.)
- Lode (a vein)
- Lodgement
- Lower
- Luff
- Luke
- Lustring
- Lye (from ashes)

- M.

- Maggoty
- Maim
- [Mayhem (Law)]
- Maize
- Maleadministration
- Malecontent
- Malefeasance
- Malepractice
- Maltreat
- Malkin
- Mall
- Malanders
- Mameluke
- Mandarin
- Mandatary
- Mandrel
- Manifestable
- Manikin
- Manœuvre
- Mantle
- Mark
- Marque (license)
- Marquee
- Marquis
- Marshal
- Marten
- Martingale
- Mask
- Maslin
- Mastic
- Matins
- Mattress
- Meagre
- Mediæval

- Meliorate [If written ameliorate, follow copy.]

- Menagerie
- Merchandise
- Mere (a pool)
- Metre
- Mew
- Mewl
- Mileage
- Milleped
- Millrea
- Miscall
- Misspell
- Misspend
- Misy (Min.)
- Mistletoe
- Mitre
- Mizzen
- Moccason
- Mocha-stone
- Modillion
- Molasses
- Moneyed
- Mongrel
- Monodrame
- Mood
- Moresque
- Morion
- Mortgageor
- Mosque
- Mosquito
- Mould
- Moult
- Mulch
- Mullin
- Multiped
- Mummery
- Murder
- Murderous
- Murky
- Murrhine
- Muscle [Animal tissue.] {p150}
- [Mussel (A shell-fish.)]
- Musket
- Mustache
- Myth

- N.

- Nankeen
- Naught
- Negotiate
- Net (a., clear)
- Nib
- Nobless
- Nombles
- Novitiate
- Nozle
- Nuisance

- O.

- Oblique
- Octahedron
- Offence
- Offuscate
- Olio
- Omer
- Opaque
- Orach
- Orison
- Osier
- Osmazome
- Osprey
- Ottar [If written Attar, follow copy.]
- Outrageous
- Oxidate
- Oxidation
- Oxide
- Oxidize
- Oyes

- P.

- Pacha
- Packet
- Painim
- Palanquin
- Palette
- Palmiped
- Pandore
- Panel
- Pansy
- Pantagraph
- Pappoose
- Parallelopiped
- Paralyze
- Parcenary
- Parol (a.)
- Paroquet
- Parral
- Parsnip
- Partisan
- Patin
- Patrol
- Paver
- Pawl
- Pedler
- Pedlery
- Peep
- Penance
- Penniless
- Pentahedral
- Pentahedron
- Pentile
- Peony
- Perch
- Persimmon
- Persistence
- Pewit
- Phantasm
- Phantom
- Phenomenon
- Phial [If written Vial, follow copy.]
- Philter
- Phlegm
- Phœnix
- Phthisic
- [Piked Ending in a point.]

- Picked [Spruce; smartly or foppishly dressed.]

- Picket
- [Piquet A game at cards.]
- Picturesque
- Pie
- Piebald
- Pimento
- Pincers
- Placard
- Plain [A level, open field.]
- [Plane So written in science and the arts.]
- Plane-sailing
- Plaster
- Plat
- Plethora
- Pleurisy
- Pliers
- Plough
- Ploughman
- Ploughshare
- Plumber
- Plumiped
- Pluviameter
- Poise
- Poltroon
- Polyanthus
- Polyhedral
- Polyhedron
- Pomade
- Pommel
- Pontoon
- Pony
- Porpoise
- Portray
- Portress
- Postilion
- Potato
- Pottage
- Practise (v.) {p151}
- Præmunire
- Premise
- Pretence
- Preterite
- Pretor
- Prison-base
- Probate
- Profane
- Protector
- Prothonotaryship
- Prunello
- Pumpkin

- [Puisne (Law) Thus written as a technical word.]

- Puny
- Pupillary
- Purblind
- Purlin
- Purr
- Purslain
- Pursy
- Putrefy
- Pygmean
- Pygmy
- Pyx

- Q.

- Quarantine
- Quartet
- Quatercousin
- Quay (a mole)
- Quinsy
- Quintain
- Quintal
- Quitter
- Quoit

- R.

- Raccoon
- Raillery
- Ransom
- Rarefy
- Raspberry
- Ratafia
- Rattan
- Raven (prey)
- Raze
- Razure
- Real (coin)
- Rear
- Rearmouse
- Rearward
- Recall
- Recognizable
- Recognizance
- Recognize
- Recognizee
- Recognizor
- Recompense
- Reconnoitre
- Redoubt
- Redoubtable
- Reenforcement
- Referable
- Reflection
- Reflective
- Reglet
- Reindeer
- Reinstall
- Relic
- Renard [If written Reynard, follow copy.]
- Rennet
- Replier
- Reposit

- Resin [This is the scientific term for the “inspissated exudations of certain families of plants.”]

- Rosin [The name of the commonest resin in use, “when employed in a solid state for ordinary purposes.”]

- Resistance
- Respite
- Restiff [If written restive, follow copy.]

- Restiffness [If written restiveness, follow copy.]

- Retch (to vomit)
- Reverie [If written revery, follow copy.]
- Reversible
- Rhomb
- [Rhumb (Nav.)]
- Ribbon
- Rider
- Rinse
- Risk
- Riveted
- Robbin
- [Robin (Orn.)]
- Rodomontade
- Roquelaure
- Route (course)
- Rummage
- Runnet
- Rye

S.

Sabianism
Sag
Saic
Sainfoin
Salic
Saltcellar
Sandarach
Sandiver
Sanitary
Sarcenet
Sat
Satchel
Satinet
Savin

Saviour [When the Redeemer is meant, the u should be retained. Worcester’s note under this word says that error, favor, and honor are derived directly from {p152} the Latin, whereas there is no classical Latin word corresponding to the Greek saviour = σωτήρ.]

[Savior This orthography is proper when a sacred meaning is not attached to the word.]

Scallop
Scath
Scenery
Sceptic
Sceptical
Scepticism
Schist
Schistose
Scholium
Schorl
Sciagraphy
Sciomachy
Scion
Scirrhosity
Scirrhous [a.]
Scirrhus [n.]
Scissors
Sconce
Scotfree
Scow
Screen
Scrofula
Scythe
Seamstress
Sear
Searce
Secretaryship
Seethe
Seignior
Seine (a net)
Seizin
Sellenders
Selvage
Sentinel
Sentry
Sequin
Sergeant
Sergeantry
Sesspool [If written cesspool, follow copy.]
Sevennight
Shad
Shard

Shark (v.) [But shirk is more common, follow copy.]

Shawm
Sheathe (v.)
Sheer (pure)
Sheik
Shemitic
Sherbet
Sherry
Shorling
Show
Showbread
Shrillness
Shroud
Shuttlecock
Shyly
Shyness
Sienite
Silicious
Sill
Sillabub
Simar
Siphon
Siren
Sirloin
Sirocco
Sirup
Sit (to incubate)
Site
Sizar
Size (glue)
Skate
Skein
Skilful
Skulk
Skull
Slabber
Slake (to quench)
Sleight (n.)
Sley (a reed)
Sluice
Slyly
Slyness
Smallness
Smirk
Smooth (v.)
Soap
Socage
Socle
Solan
Solder
Soldier
Soliped
Solitaire
Solvable
Somerset
Sonneteer
Soothe (v.)
Sorrel
Souse
Spa
Spicknel
Spinach
Spinel
Splice
Sponge
Spongy
Spright
Sprightful
Spunk
Spurt
Stable
Staddle
Stanch
Stationery (n.)
Steadfast
Steelyard
Sterile
Stillness
Stockade
Strait (n.)
Strap
Strengthener
Strew
Stupefy {p153}
Sty
Style
Subtile (thin)
Subtle (sly)
Subtract
Subtraction
Suit
Suitor
Sulky (n.)
Sulphuretted
Sumach
Suretyship
Surname
Surprise
Surreptitious
Survivor
Survivorship
Swale
Sward
Swath (n.)
Sweepstakes
Swipple
Swop [If written swap, follow copy.]
Sycamore
Sylvan
Synonyme
Syphilis
Systematize

- T.

- Tabard
- Taffety
- Taffrail
- Taillage
- Talc (a stone)
- Tallness
- Talmud
- Tambour
- Tambourine
- Tarpauling
- Tartan
- Tassel
- Tawny
- Tease
- Teazle
- Tenable
- Terrier
- Tether
- Tetrastich
- Theodolite
- Thraldom
- Thrash
- Threshold
- Throe (a pang)
- Thyine (wood)
- Thyme
- Ticking
- Tidbit
- Tie
- Tier (a row)
- Tierce
- Tiger
- Tincal
- Tint
- Tiny
- Tippler
- Tithe
- Toilet
- Toll (to allure)
- Tollbooth
- Ton

- [Tun (Tun is the usual orthography when a large cask or wine measure [252 gallons] is meant; Ton when a weight of 20 cwt., the space in a ship, or a measure of timber is meant.—Brande.)]

- Tonnage
- Tormentor
- Touchy
- Tourmaline
- Trance
- Tranquillity
- Tranquillize
- Transferable
- Transferrence
- Treadle
- Treenail
- Trellis
- Trentals
- Trestle
- Trevet
- Trousers
- Truckle-bed
- Tumbrel
- Turkey
- Turkois
- Turnip
- Turnsole
- Tutenag
- Tweedle
- Twibil
- Tymbal
- Tyro

- U.

- Umbles
- Unbias
- Unbiassed
- Unbigoted
- Unroll
- Until

- V.

- Vaivode
- Vales (money)
- Valise
- Vantbrace
- Vat (a vessel)
- Vaudevil
- Vavasor
- Veil (cover)
- Vender
- [Vendor (Law)]
- Veneer
- Venomous
- Verdigris
- Vermilion
- Vermin
- Verst

- Vertebre [If written Vertebra, follow copy.] {p154}

- Vervain
- Vice (a screw)
- Vicious
- Villain
- Villanous
- Villany
- Visitatorial
- Visitor
- Visor
- Vitiate
- Vizier
- Volcano

- W.

- Wagon
- Waif
- Waive (to defer)
- Wale
- Walrus
- Warranter
- [Warrantor (Law)]
- War-whoop
- Waul
- Wear (v.)
- Wear (n.)
- Weasand
- Welsh
- Whang
- Whelk
- Whippletree
- Whippoorwill
- Whiskey
- Whitleather
- Whoop
- Whooping-cough
- Widgeon
- Wilful
- Windlass
- Wintry
- Wiry
- Witch-elm
- With (n.)
- Withal
- Wizard
- Woe
- Woful
- Wondrous
- Woodbine
- Woodchuck
- Woollen
- Wreathe (v.)
- Wreck
- Wriggle

- Y.

- Yawl
- Yearn
- Yeast
- Yelk
- Yerk
- Yew

- Z.

- Zaffre
- Zinc
- Zymology

There is a large class of words ending either in able or ible, amounting to more than sixteen hundred. For these we know of no general rule which can be given, that would readily indicate the proper termination. In practice, writers and printers, with rare exceptions, are obliged at times to depend on something besides memory to secure correctness; and if the dictionary is not at hand, the wrong termination may—as in fact it often does—get into print. So excellent a work as “The American First Class Book” prints an extract from Webster’s Plymouth oration thus:

If any practices exist, contrary to the principles of justice and humanity, within the reach of our laws or our influence, we are inexcusible if we do not exert ourselves to restrain and abolish them. {p155}

And in a periodical which is sent broadcast over the United States, occurs the following paragraph (April 24, 1888), copied from a report made by Henry Clay in 1838:

That authors and inventors have, according to the practice among civilized nations, a property in the respective productions of their genius is incontestible, etc.

We append below, for convenient reference, a catalogue of the words referred to, including (1) those in present use; (2) those that are rare; and (3) the obsolete. The latter often occur in reprints, and are sometimes resuscitated or galvanized for a present purpose,—as, for instance, in a recent popular novel, of wide circulation, there occurs three or more times, the word “ineluctable,” denoted by Webster as obsolete. We may have omitted some words that should have been inserted, but believe we have accomplished our object within very negligible limits of error.

A word in parenthesis indicates a various mode of spelling the word immediately preceding.

WORDS ENDING IN ABLE.

Abatable
Abdicable
Abolishable
Abominable
Abrogable
Absolvable
Absorbable
Abusable
Accentuable
Acceptable
Acclimatable
Accomplishable
Accordable
Accostable
Accountable
Accusable
Achievable
Acidifiable
Acquirable
Actable
Actionable
Adaptable
Addable
(Addible)
Adjustable
Administrable
Admirable
Admittable
(Admittible)
Adoptable
Adorable
Advantageable
Advisable
Affable
Affilliable
Affirmable
Aggrandizable
Agitable
Agreeable
Alienable
Alkalifiable
Allegeable
Allowable
Alterable
Amassable
Ameliorable
Amenable
Amendable
Amiable
Amicable
Amusable
Analyzable
Anchorable
Annihilable
Answerable
Appealable
Appeasable
Appliable
Applicable
Appointable
Appreciable
Approachable
Appropriable
Approvable
Arable
Arbitrable
Arguable
Argumentable
Ascertainable
Ascribable
Aspectable
Assailable
Assaultable
Assessable
Assignable
Assimilable
Associable
Atonable
Attachable
Attackable
Attainable
Attemptable
Attractable
Attributable
Augmentable
Authorizable
Available
Avoidable
Avouchable
Avowable
Bailable
Bankable
Batable
Bearable
Beggable
Believable
Bendable
Bequeathable
Bewailable
Blamable
Boardable
Boatable
Bounceable
Breakable
Breathable
Calcinable
Calculable
Capable
Carriable
Causable
Censurable
Challengeable
Changeable
Chargeable
Charitable
Chastisable
Cheatable
Circulable
Circumnavigable
Circumscribable
Citable
Civilizable
Claimable
Classifiable
Cleansable
Cleavable
Clergyable
Climbable
Coagulable
Cogitable
Cognizable
Collatable
Colorable
Combatable
Comfortable
Commandable
Commeasurable
Commemorable
Commendable
Commensurable
Commonable
Communicable
Commutable
Companionable
Comparable
Compassable
Compellable
Compliable
Comportable
Compoundable
Computable
Concealable
Conceivable
Concordable
Condemnable
Condensable
Conferrable
Confinable
Confirmable
Confiscable
Conformable
Confusable
Confutable
Congeable
Congealable
Conjecturable
Conquerable
Conscionable
Conservable
Considerable
Consolable
Constrainable
Consumable
Containable
Contaminable
Conterminable
Contestable
Continuable
Contradictable
Contributable
Contrivable
Controllable
Conversable
Conveyable
Countable
Countermandable
Covetable
Creatable
Creditable
Criticisable
Crummable
Crystallizable
Culpable
Cultivable
Cultivatable
Culturable
Curable
Customable
Damageable
Debatable
Deceivable
Decidable
Decipherable
Declarable
Declinable
Decomposable
Decompoundable
Decreeable
Definable
Deflagrable
Delectable
Deliverable
Deludable
Demandable
Demisable
Demonstrable
Deniable
Denominable
Denotable
Deplorable
Deposable
Deprecable
Deprivable
Derivable
Describable
Designable
Desirable
Despicable
Detectable
Determinable
Detestable
Devisable
Diggable
Dilatable
Diminishable
Disagreeable
Disallowable
Disciplinable
Discommendable
Disconformable
Discountable
Discourageable
Discoverable
Discreditable
Disenable
Dishonorable
Disintegrable
Dispensable
Displaceable
Disposable
Disproportionable
Disprovable
Dispunishable
Disputable
Disreputable
Disserviceable
Dissociable
Dissolvable
Distillable
Distinguishable
Distrainable
Distributable
Diversifiable
Dividable
Divorceable
(Divorcible)
Doubtable
Dowable
Drainable
Dramatizable
Drawable
Drinkable
Dupable
Durable
Dutiable
Eatable
Effable
Effaceable
Electrifiable
Electrolyzable
Emendable
Employable
Endable
Endurable
Enforceable
(Enforcible)
Englishable
Enjoyable
Enticeable
Enunciable
Enviable
Equable
Equitable
Eradicable
Erasable
Erectable
Escapable
Escheatable
Estimable
Evaporable
Examinable
Exceptionable
Exchangeable
Excisable
Excitable
Excommunicable
Exculpable
Excusable
Execrable
Exemplifiable
Exercisable
(Exercisible)
Exhalable
Exorable
Expectable
Expellable
Expiable
Expirable
Explainable
Explicable
Exportable
Extinguishable
Extirpable
Extractable
(Extractible)
Extricable
Exuviable
Falsifiable
Farmable
Fashionable
Fathomable
Favorable
Fellable
Fermentable
Figurable
Finable
Fixable
Fordable
Foreknowable
Forfeitable
Forgivable
Formidable
Fortifiable
Framable
Friable
Fundable
Furbishable
Gainable
Gaugeable
Gelable
Generable
Generalizable
Governable
Grantable
Graspable
Guardable
Guerdonable
Guessable
Guidable
Habitable
Hammerable
Handleable
Hatable
Hazardable
Healable
Heriotable
Heritable
Homageable
Honorable
Hospitable
Husbandable
Hybridizable
Identifiable
Illapsable
Illaudable
Illimitable
Illuminable
Illustrable
Imaginable
Imitable
Immalleable
Immeasurable
Immedicable
Immemorable
Immensurable
Immersable
(Immersible)
Immitigable
Immovable
Immutable
Impalpable
Impassable
Impassionable
Impeachable
Impeccable
Impenetrable
Imperforable
Imperishable
Impermeable
Imperturbable
Imperviable
Implacable
Impliable
Imponderable
Importable
Imposable
Impracticable
Impregnable
Impressionable
Impreventable
Improbable
Improvable
Impugnable
Imputable
Inaffable
Inalienable
Inamovable
Inappealable
Inapplicable
Inappreciable
Inapproachable
Inarable
Incalculable
Incapable
Incensurable
Incinerable
Inclinable
Incoagulable
Incogitable
Incognizable
Incommensurable
Incommunicable
Incommutable
Incomparable
Incompensable
Incompliable
Incomputable
Inconcealable
Inconceivable
Incondensable
Incongealable
Inconsiderable
Inconsolable
Inconsumable
Incontestable
Incontrollable
Increasable
Incrystallizable
Inculpable
Incurable
Indecimable
Indecipherable
Indeclinable
Indecomposable
Indefatigable
Indefinable
Indelectable
Indemonstrable
Indeprecable
Indeprivable
Indescribable
Indesirable
Indeterminable
Indictable
Indiminishable
Indisciplinable
Indiscoverable
Indispensable
Indisputable
Indissolvable
Indistinguishable
Indomitable
Indorsable
Indubitable
Ineffable
Ineffaceable
Inequitable
Ineradicable
Inestimable
Inevitable
Inexcitable
Inexcusable
Inexecutable
Inexorable
Inexpiable
Inexplicable
Inexplorable
Inexpugnable
Inexsuperable
Inexterminable
Inextinguishable
Inextirpable
Inextricable
Inferable
(Inferrible)
Inflammable
Inflatable
Ingelable
Ingenerable
Inhabitable
Inheritable
Inhospitable
Inimaginable
Inimitable
Inirritable
Innavigable
Innumerable
Inobservable
Inoculable
Inoxidizable
Inquirable
Insanable
Insatiable
Insaturable
Inscribable
Inscrutable
Insecable
Inseparable
Inseverable
Insolvable
Inspirable
Instable
Insufferable
Insultable
Insuperable
Insupportable
Insupposable
Insurable
Insurmountable
Intastable
Intenable
Interchangeable
Intercommunicable
Interminable
Interpolable
Interpretable
Intestable
Intolerable
Intractable
Intransmutable
Invaluable
Invariable
Investigable
Inviolable
Invitrifiable
Invulnerable
Irrebuttable
Irreclaimable
Irrecognizable
Irreconcilable
Irrecordable
Irrecoverable
Irrecusable
Irredeemable
Irrefragable
Irrefutable
Irrejectable
Irrelievable
Irremeable
Irremediable
Irremovable
Irremunerable
Irreparable
Irrepealable
Irrepleviable
Irreplevisable
Irrepresentable
Irreproachable
Irreprovable
Irresolvable
Irrespirable
Irresuscitable
Irretraceable
Irretrievable
Irreturnable
Irrevealable
Irrevocable
Irrevokable
Irritable
Isolable
Issuable
Judicable
Justiciable
Justifiable
Knittable
Knowable
Lacerable
Lamentable
Laminable
Lapsable
Laudable
Laughable
Learnable
Leasable
Lendable
Leviable
Levigable
Liable
Licensable
Liftable
Likable
Limitable
Liquable
Liquefiable
Litigable
Loanable
Lodgeable
Losable
Lovable
Magnifiable
Mailable
Mainpernable
Maintainable
Malleable
Manageable
Manifestable
(Manifestible)
Marketable
Marriageable
Masticable
Measurable
Medicable
Memorable
Mendable
Mensurable
Mentionable
Merchantable
Miserable
Misinterpretable
Mistakable
Mitigable
Mixable
Modifiable
Moldable
Mollifiable
Mootable
Mountable
Movable
Multipliable
Multiplicable
Mutable
Namable
Navigable
Negotiable
Nonexcommunicable
Notable
Noticeable
Nourishable
Numerable
Objectionable
Obligable
Observable
Obtainable
Offerable
Opposable
Ordainable
Orderable
Organizable
Originable
Overcapable
Oxidable
Oxidizable
Oxygenizable
Palatable
Palpable
Pardonable
Partable
(Partible)
Passable
Pasturable
Patentable
Pawnable
Payable
Peaceable
Peccable
Penetrable
Perceivable
Perdurable
Performable
Perishable
Permeable
Permutable
Perpetuable
Personable
Perspirable
Persuadable
Picturable
Pierceable
Pitiable
Placable
Plantable
Pleadable
Pleasurable
Pliable
Plowable
Poisonable
Polarizable
Polishable
Polysyllable
Ponderable
Portable
Potable
Powerable
Practicable
Precipitable
Predeterminable
Predicable
Preferable
Preparable
Presentable
Preservable
Prestable
Presumable
Preventable
Probable
Procurable
Profitable
Prognosticable
Prolongable
Pronounceable
Propagable
Proportionable
Proratable
Prosecutable
Protrudable
Provable
Provokable
Publishable
Pulverable
Pulverizable
Punishable
Purchasable
Pursuable
Quadrable
Qualifiable
Quenchable
Questionable
Quotable
Raisable
Ratable
(Rateable)
Reachable
Readable
Realizable
Reasonable
Rebukable
Recallable
Receivable
Reclaimable
Recognizable
Recommendable
Reconcilable
Recoverable
Rectifiable
Redeemable
Redemandable
Redoubtable
Reexaminable
Referable
(Referrible)
Refusable
Refutable
Regrettable
Reissuable
Rejectable
Relaxable
Releasable
Reliable
Relievable
Relishable
Remarkable
Remediable
Removable
Remunerable
Renderable
Renewable
Rentable
Reobtainable
Repairable
Reparable
Repayable
Repealable
Repleviable
Representable
Reproachable
Reprovable
Repudiable
Reputable
Rescindable
Rescuable
Resolvable
Respectable
Respirable
Restorable
Restrainable
Resumable
Resuscitable
Retainable
Retractable
(Retractible)
Retrievable
Returnable
Revealable
Revengeable
Reviewable
Revivable
Revocable
Rewardable
Rollable
Ruinable
Rulable
Sailable
Salable
Salifiable
Salvable
Sanable
Saponifiable
Satisfiable
Saturable
Savable
Scalable
Searchable
Seasonable
Securable
Seizable
Separable
Sequestrable
Servable
Serviceable
Shapable
Shiftable
Sizable
Sociable
Solvable
Sortable
Soundable
Spoilable
Squeezable
Statable
Statutable
Suable
Subconformable
Sublimable
Subscribable
Succorable
Sufferable
Suitable
Superserviceable
Supportable
Supposable
Surmountable
Surpassable
Sustainable
Tamable
Tannable
Tastable
Taxable
Teachable
Tellable
Temperable
Temptable
Tenable
Tenantable
Terminable
Testable
Tillable
Tithable
Tolerable
Tollable
Torturable
Touchable
Traceable
Tractable
Trainable
Transferable
(Transferrible)
Transformable
Translatable
Transmeatable
Transmutable
Transpirable
Transportable
Transposable
Traversable
Treasonable
Treatable
Triable
Triturable
Tunable
Ulcerable
Unacceptable
Unaccountable
Unadvisable
Unagreeable
Unaidable
Unamiable
Unanswerable
Unappealable
Unapproachable
Unaskable
Unavoidable
Uncharitable
Uncleanable
Uncomeatable
Uncomfortable
Uncommunicable
Unconformable
Unconscionable
Uncontrollable
Uncustomable
Undauntable
Undeniable
Undivinable
Unexceptionable
Unextinguishable
Unfashionable
Unfathomable
Unfavorable
Unforgetable
Ungovernable
Unimpeachable
Unitable
Unknowable
Unmalleable
Unmerchantable
Unmeritable
Unmistakable
Unpassable
Unpeaceable
Unpeerable
Unprofitable
Unquestionable
Unreasonable
Unreconcilable
Unreliable
Unrebukable
Unreckonable
Unreprovable
Unsalable
Unsearchable
Unseasonable
Unsociable
Unspeakable
Unstable
Unsuitable
Unutterable
Unwarrantable
Unwedgeable
Usable
Utterable
Valuable
Vanquishable
Vaporable
Vaporizable
Variable
Veerable
Vegetable
Venerable
Verifiable
Veritable
Viable
Vindicable
Violable
Visitable
Vitrifiable
Voidable
Volatilizable
Voyageable
Vulnerable
Warrantable
Washable
Wearable
Weighable
Weldable
Wieldable
Workable

WORDS ENDING IN “ABLE”; RARE.

- Accomptable (or obs.)
- Accommodable
- Accustomable
- Baptizable
- Burnable
- Borable
- Carriageable
- Catchable
- Commiserable
- Complainable
- Defendable
- Despisable
- Destroyable
- Discontinuable
- Dissipable
- Donable
- Dubitable
- Educable
- Effluviable
- Emulable
- Entreatable
- Equiparable
- Errable
- Esteemable
- Executable
- Expugnable
- Frustrable
- Gatherable
- Gettable
- Hereditable
- Illaqueable
- Imageable
- Impalatable
- Imperceivable
- Impersuadable
- Incicurable
- Inequable
- Innominable
- Manducable
- Marriable
- Matchable
- Medicinable
- Meltable
- Mockable
- Pacificable
- Pregnable
- Quittable
- Razorable
- Recuperable
- Refragable
- Regardable
- Regulable
- Rememberable
- Replantable
- Replevisable
- Repugnable
- Scrutable
- Smokable
- Speakable
- Strangleable
- Subduable
- Superable
- Suspectable
- Tractable
- Thinkable
- Transpassable
- Unalienable
- Unculpable
- Understandable
- Unforeseeable
- Unhabitable
- Unlimitable
- Unmakable
- Unmeasurable
- Unmovable
- Unscrutable
- Untractable
- Unvoyageable
- Walkable
- Weariable
- Wishable
- Worshipable
- Woundable
- Yieldable

WORDS ENDING IN “ABLE”; OBSOLETE.

Abhominable
Acetable
Accompanable
Accomptable (or rare.)
Acquaintable
Animable
Aptable
Battable
Behoovable
Bowable
Chanceable
Colliquable
Circumstantiable
Combinable
Companable
Companiable
Compassionable
Compensable
Conciliable
Consortable
Conspectable
Conusable
Convenable
Counselable
Covenable
Creable
Defatigable
Delightable
Dependable
Depredable
Destinable
Devitable
Disable
Disadvantageable
Discomfortable
Discordable
Discriminable
Disfavorable
Dispraisable
Disprofitable
Doctrinable
Domable
Dreadable
Earable
Effrayable
Endamageable
Eterminable
Exceedable
Excoriable
Excreable
Excruciable
Exoptable
Exuperable
Fatigable
Fittable
Flammable
Foilable
Frequentable
Grievable
Guildable
Gustable
Illacerable
Illeviable
Immatchable
Immixable
Impacable
Impardonable
Imperscrutable
Impetrable
Impierceable
Improfitable
Improportionable
Inaidable
Inalterable
Inamiable
Incessable
Incharitable
Incomformable
Inconscionable
Incremable
Individable
Indomable
Indomptable
Ineluctable
Inenarrable
Inerrable
Inexhalable
Inexplainable
Inexuperable
Infashionable
Infatigable
Informidable
Ingustable
Injudicable
Inopinable
Insociable
Insuitable
Intricable
Inutterable
Irrecuperable
Irreputable
Iterable
Jaculable
Justiceable
Lachrymable
Leisurable
Makable
Maniable
Markable
Mercable
Merciable
Meritable
Mingleable
Mirable
Miscarriageable
Moderable
Modificable
Moltable
Narrable
Oathable
Objectable
Occasionable
Operable
Opinable
Optable
Ordinable
Overturnable
Painable
Parable
Parallelable
Perceable
Perflable
Perspicable
Postable
Praisable
Replevisable
Resemblable
Rowable
Sacrificable
Screable
Scribable
Semblable
Spirable
Strainable
Suspicable
Trafficable
Transmeable
Troublable
Unappliable
Unapplicable
Uncapable
Unconceivable
Uncontestable
Uncounselable
Uncovenable
Uncreditable
Uncurable
Undefatigable
Undepartable
Undertakable
Undestroyable
Undeterminable
Undisputable
Undoubtable
Undubitable
Undwellable
Unequalable
Unevitable
Unexcusable
Unextricable
Unfailable
Unframable
Unhospitable
Unimitable
Unmasterable
Unnumerable
Unpenetrable
Unperishable
Unplacable
Unpracticable
Unprizable
Unquarrelable
Unremovable
Unreproachable
Unreputable
Unsatiable
Unseparable
Unshakable
Unsightable
Unsucceedable
Unsufferable
Unsupportable
Unswayable
Untellable
Untriumphable
Untrowable
Unvaluable
Unvariable
Unvulnerable
Vailable
Vengeable
Veniable
Versable
Vituperable
Volitable
Wainable
Warhable

WORDS ENDING IN IBLE.

Abhorrible
Accendible
Accessible
Addible
(Addable)
Adducible
Admissible
Adustible
Apprehensible
Ascendible
Audible
Bipartible
Circumscriptible
Classible
Coctible
Coercible
Cognoscible
Cohesible
Collectible
Combustible
Compactible
Compatible
Comprehensible
Compressible
Concrescible
Conducible
Conductible
Confluxible
Contemptible
Contractible
Controvertible
Conversible
Convertible
Convincible
Correctible
Corrigible
Corrodible
Corrosible
Corruptible
Credible
Decoctible
Deducible
Deductible
Defeasible
Defectible
Defensible
Descendible
Destructible
Diffusible
Digestible
Discernible
Dissectible
Distensible
Distractible
Divertible
Divestible
Divisible
Divorcible
(Divorceable)
Docible
Edible
Educible
Effectible
Effervescible
Eligible
Eludible
Enforcible
(Enforceable)
Evincible
Exercisible
(Exercisable)
Exhaustible
Expansible
Expressible
Extendible
Extensible
Extractible
(Extractable)
Fallible
Feasible
Fencible
Fermentescible
Flexible
Fluxible
Forcible
Frangible
Fungible
Fusible
Gullible
Horrible
Ignitible
Illegible
Immersible
(Immersable)
Immiscible
Impartible
Impassible
Impedible
Imperceptible
Impersuasible
Implausible
Impossible
Imprescriptible
Impressible
Imputrescible
Inaccessible
Inadmissible
Inapprehensible
Inaudible
Incircumscriptible
Incoercible
Incombustible
Incommiscible
Incompatible
Incomprehensible
Incompressible
Inconcussible
Incontrovertible
Inconvertible
Inconvincible
Incorrigible
Incorrodible
Incorruptible
Incredible
Indefeasible
Indefectible
Indefensible
Indelible
Indeprehensible
Indestructible
Indigestible
Indiscernible
Indiscerptible
Indivisible
Indocible
Inducible
Ineffervescible
Ineligible
Ineludible
Inevasible
Inexhaustible
Inexpansible
Inexpressible
Infallible
Infeasible
Inferrible
(Inferable)
Inflexible
Infrangible
Infusible
Inscriptible
Insensible
Instructible
Insuppressible
Insusceptible
Intactible
Intangible
Intelligible
Interconvertible
Intervisible
Invendible
Inventible
Invertible
Invincible
Invisible
Irascible
Irreducible
Irrefrangible
Irremissible
Irreprehensible
Irrepressible
Irresistible
Irresponsible
Irreversible
Legible
Manifestible
(Manifestable)
Marcescible
Miscible
Negligible
Nexible
Omissible
Ostensible
Partible
(Partable)
Passible
Perceptible
Perfectible
Permiscible
Permissible
Persuasible
Pervertible
Plausible
Possible
Prehensible
Prescriptible
Producible
Productible
Putrescible
Quadrible
Receptible
Redemptible
Redressible
Reducible
Re-eligible
Referrible
(Referable)
Reflectible
Reflexible
Refrangible
Remissible
Renascible
Rend-ible (from rend)
Ren-dible (from render)
Reprehensible
Resistible
Responsible
Retractible
(Retractable)
Reversible
Revertible
Risible
Seducible
Sensible
Sponsible
Subdivisible
Subvertible
Supersensible
Suppressible
Susceptible
Suspensible
Tangible
Terrible
Transferrible
(Tranferable)
Transfusible
Transmissible
Transmittible
Tripartible
Vendible
Vincible
Visible
Vitrescible

WORDS ENDING IN “IBLE”; RARE.

- Affectible
- Cessible
- Committible
- Compossible
- Convictible
- Cullible
- Discerpible
- Discerptible
- Evadible
- Evasible
- Exigible
- Impatible
- Impermissible
- Incognoscible
- Infractible
- Insubmergible
- Suasible
- Tensible
- Traducible
- Transvertible
- Unadmissible
- Unadmittible
- Unexhaustible
- Unexpressible
- Unflexible
- Unfusible
- Unrepressible
- Unresponsible

WORDS ENDING IN “IBLE”; OBSOLETE.

- Agible
- Appetible
- Alible
- Comestible
- Comminuible
- Competible
- Comptible
- Conceptible
- Conclusible
- Congestible
- Deceptible
- Decerptible
- Depectible
- Depertible
- Deprehensible
- Erigible
- Exemptible
- Expetible
- Fensible
- Fulcible
- Ignoscible
- Immarcescible
- Imperdible
- Impertransible
- Inamissible
- Incompossible
- Inconceptible
- Inconsumptible
- Indefeisible
- Indicible
- Indiscerpible
- Indistinctible
- Inextinguible
- Intransgressible
- Inquisible
- Intenible
- Irremittible
- Miscible
- Obedible
- Odible
- Offensible
- Patible
- Regible
- Sejungible
- Sepelible
- Suadible
- Suasible
- Subjicible
- Unaccessible
- Uncorrigible
- Uncorruptible
- Uncredible
- Undefeasible
- Uneligible
- Unfallible
- Unfrangible
- Unpossible
- Unresistible
- Unsensible
- Untangible
- Unvisible

NOUNS ENDING IN O.

Errors sometimes occur in forming the plural of nouns in o. We frequently see frescoes, mottos,—both wrong. The general rule is, If the final o has a vowel before it, form the plural by adding s: as “cameo, cameos”; if a consonant precede the final o, add es; as “archipelago, archipelagoes.” Such exceptions to the general rule as are most frequently met with, and a few that are rare, we here subjoin: {p168}

Albino | Albinos
Armadillo | Armadillos
Busto | Bustos
Canto | Cantos
Catso | Catsos
Cento | Centos
Dido | Didos
Domino | Dominos
Duo | Duos
Duodecimo | Duodecimos
Embryo | Embryos
Exaltado | Exaltados
Folio | Folios
Fresco | Frescos
Gaucho | Gauchos
Grotto | Grottos
Halo | Halos
Inamorato | Inamoratos
Internuncio | Internuncios
Junto | Juntos
Lasso | Lassos
Limbo | Limbos
Memento | Mementos
Merino | Merinos
Mestizo | Mestizos
Nuncio | Nuncios
Octavo | Octavos
Octodecimo | Octodecimos
Piano | Pianos
Portico | Porticoes, Wb. or Porticos, Wor.
Portfolio | Portfolios
Proviso | Provisos
Punctilio | Punctilios
Quarto | Quartos
Rotundo | Rotundos
Salvo | Salvos
Sextodecimo | Sextodecimos
Sirocco | Siroccos
Solo | Solos
Trio | Trios
Two | Twos
Tyro | Tyros
Virtuoso | Virtuosos
Zero | Zeros

But “albugo” has pl. “albugines”; and to “imago” we should probably have to write pl. “imagines.” There are many nouns ending in o, for whose plurals we have not found any authority beyond the general rule. With the exceptions given above, the rule may be safely followed. The plural of “portico” is a matter of style: and there is some authority for “quartoes.”

WORDS ENDING IN ISE.

Words ending with the sound of ize are variously spelled ise or ize. Of this class the correct spelling of the following words is ise; nearly if not quite all others take ize. {p169}

- Advertise
- Advise
- Affranchise
- Apprise
- Catechise
- Chastise
- Circumcise
- Comprise
- Compromise
- Criticise
- Demise
- Despise
- Devise
- Disfranchise
- Disguise
- Divertise
- Emprise
- Enfranchise
- Enterprise
- Exercise
- Exorcise
- Franchise
- Merchandise
- Misprise
- Premise
- Reprise
- Revise
- Supervise
- Surmise
- Surprise

EI AND IE.

Many persons find it difficult or impossible to recollect the relative position of e and i, in such words as receive, believe, etc. If they will bear in mind the following rule, it may save them the trouble of referring to a dictionary for this point.

When the derivative noun ends in tion, the verb is spelled with ei: thus,—

Conception | Conceive
Deception | Deceive
Reception | Receive

But when the noun does not end in tion, the verb is spelled with ie: as,—

Belief | Believe

WORDS ENDING IN “CION.”

Disregarding the dissyllable scion, we think there are but three words in use having this termination, viz.: Coercion, Ostracion, Suspicion. Two obsolete words are Internecion and Pernicion. {p170}

ENSURE, INSURE, ETC.

The language has been sometimes enriched by retaining the several forms of a “doubtful” word, as in the case of draft and draught, each form having limitations of meaning peculiar to itself. Ensure and Insure we propose to consider distinct words rather than various spellings of the same words. So, also, of Enure and Inure.

- Ensure. [To make sure, certain, or safe; “How to ensure peace for any term of years.” To insure is to contract, for a consideration, to secure against loss; as to insure houses, ships, lives.]

- Insure. [To underwrite; “to covenant, for a consideration, to indemnify for loss of anything specified”; as, to insure houses against fire, etc.]

- Enure. [“To serve to the use or benefit of”; as, a gift of land enures to the benefit of the grantee. “The argument was made [a century ago] as now, that its [a protective policy’s] benefits enured to particular classes or sections.”—B. Harrison’s Inaugural Address.]

- Inure [To accustom; as, a man inures his body to heat and cold; a soldier to blood inured.]

CHAPTER VII. CAPITALIZATION.

To persons who have paid no special, technical attention to the subject, capitalization appears a very simple matter. The rules are few and easily understood; but as to the “application of them” there is some perplexity and much diversity among authors, printers, and proof-readers. Practically, the main difficulty seems to arise from the want of a plain line of demarkation between common nouns and proper nouns! Some write and print “Pacific Ocean” as the proper name of a certain collection of water; others, “Pacific ocean,”—ocean being a common noun. We may, perhaps, recur to this abstruse matter farther on; but at present we will lay down such rules as we have used in our own labors, and which we deem to be correct. It will be very convenient for us, and therefore we hope excusable, to adopt two phrases from the expressive terminology of the printing-office, where some words are said to be “put up,” and others to be “put down”; e. g.:

“When Music, heavenly maid, was young.”

Here “Music” is said to be “put up,” because it begins with a capital “M,” and “maid” is “put down,” because it begins with a small “m.” {p172}

“Abelard taught Eloisa music.”

Here “Abelard,” “Eloisa” are “put up,” and “music” is “put down.”

This premised, understood, and forgiven, we are ready for the—

RULES FOR THE RIGHT USE OF CAPITALS.

Rule 1. The initial letter of every sentence should be a capital.

Yours received. Glad to hear from you. Will answer next week.

Capitals, Y, G, W, as per Rule 1.

And Cain said unto the Lord, My punishment is greater than I can bear.—Genesis 4 : 13.

Capitals, A and M; for here are two sentences, although one is included in the other.

Cain said that his punishment was greater than he could bear.

Capital C, by Rule 1; but the included words of Cain being brought in obliquely, no capital is required.

Cicero said, “There is no moment without some duty”; and who doubts the wisdom of Cicero?

C and T are put up, by Rule 1.

On the first day of January, Artemus Ward made this remark: Now is a good time to resoloot.

O and N are put up, by Rule 1.

Few truisms are truer than this paradox of Aristotle,—To mankind in general, the parts are greater than the whole.

F and T are put up, by Rule 1.

It has been said, that the included sentence should not be capitalized unless immediately preceded by a colon: but the {p173} above examples show, that a sentence directly introduced must be capitalized, whatever point precedes it,—comma, comma-dash, colon, or any other pause-mark.

He asked why he was arrested, and we replied that he was arrested on suspicion.

Initial capital H, by Rule 1.

He asked, “Why am I arrested?” and we replied, “On suspicion.”

Here are three initial capitals, and properly; for the reply, fully expressed, would be, “You are arrested on suspicion.”

So, also, captions, head-lines, side-heads, etc., being imperfect sentences, fall under Rule 1. The same is true of particulars depending from a general heading; as—

- Property destroyed by the late fire:

- Seventy reams elephant paper;
- Tables, chairs, desks;
- Old-fashioned hall-clock;
- Johnson’s Dictionary, 1st ed.

We have remarked above, on the passage from Genesis, that a sentence introduced obliquely requires no capital. In the following example, whether Sparta should be inclosed with walls is an indirect question, and is not capitalized; while the answer, being direct, takes a capital.

To the question whether Sparta should be inclosed with walls, Lycurgus made this answer: “That city is well fortified which has a wall of men instead of brick.”

Kerl’s rule (Grammar, p. 41) is “Within a sentence, the first word of any important beginning may commence with a capital letter.” This rule is probably as precise as can be framed to meet his first example, “Resolved, That our Senators be requested, etc.” His second example, “One truth is clear: Whatever is, is right,” falls within his rule, and our Rule 1. (See page 81, for capitalizing, etc., preambles, resolutions, provisos, etc.) {p174}

When a sentence is introduced obliquely, a capital is not required, even if the passage introduced have quotation marks, and make perfect sense without the introductory prefix, as in the following example:

It is remarked by Parton, that “a man who retains to the age of seventy-nine the vigor of manhood and the liveliness of a boy, cannot, at any period of his life, have egregiously violated the laws of his being.”

2. The first letter in every line of poetry should be a capital.

When on the larboard quarter they descry

A liquid column towering shoot on high,

The guns were primed; the vessel northward veers,

Till her black battery on the column bears.

Falconer’s Shipwreck.

Thereat the champions both stood still a space,

To weeten what that dreadful clamor meant:

Lo! where they spied with speedy whirling pace

One in a charet of strange furniment,
Towards them driving like a storm outsent.
The charet deckèd was in wondrous wise
With gold and many a gorgeous ornament,
After the Persian monarch’s antique guise,

Such as the maker’s self could best by art devise.

Spenser’s Faerie Queene.

But in reprinting ancient hymns, etc., follow the ancient style,—as in the following from the Bible printed in London by Robert Barker, in 1615:

Here is the Spring where waters flow,
to quench our heat of sinne:

Here is the Tree where trueth doth grow,
to leade our liues therein:

This is the Iudge that stints the strife
when mens deuices faile:

Here is the Bread that feeds the life
that death can not assaile.

3. Principal words in the titles of books, of important documents, of proclamations, of edicts, of conventions, and words of especial distinction in monographs, should be put up.

Who is the author of “The Mill on the Floss”?

The English barons obtained Magna Charta, or the Great Charter, from King John, A.D. 1215.

When the Edict of Nantes was revoked by Louis XIV., above 50,000 Huguenots fled from France.

The father of Watts the hymnist, suffered much after the withdrawal of the Declaration of Indulgence.

Every State having chess clubs in its cities should organize a State Chess Association, and these associations should send delegates to the Annual Convention of the National Association.—Phil. Ledger.

The President of the United States, the Sovereign of England, and the Governors of the several States of our Union, issue proclamations. Despots issue edicts,—sometimes called by the more general name of “decrees,” as in Ezra 6 : 1, 3. From Esther 1 : 19–22 we learn that a “royal commandment” was sent into all the king’s provinces, “that every man should bear rule in his own house.” If any of our readers have occasion to put in type, or read the proof of, the title of an edict or decree, they will, of course, make it agree with the rule. Of proclamations we have several every year. Frequently all the letters of the titles are capitals; otherwise, the capitals appear as in the following example:

BY HIS EXCELLENCY, B. A.,

Governor of the State [or Commonwealth] of ——.

A PROCLAMATION for a Day of Public Humiliation, Fasting, and Prayer.

In a monograph of a geological survey the following paragraph appears:

The dark laminated clays of the Cretaceous passing up into the Upper Cretaceous are well shown . . . . passing up {p176} into brown sandstones of the Coal group. There is great uniformity in the Upper Cretaceous and Tertiary series.—

Hayden, Survey Montana.

Webster says, that the Carboniferous age “embraces three periods, the Subcarboniferous, the Carboniferous, and the Permian,” but the Fifth Ann. Rep. U. S. Geol. Survey, doubtless for some good reason, changes the style to the sub-Carboniferous (v. remark under Rule 8, on “transatlantic,” etc.).

The main subject under discussion being Woman Suffrage, those words were properly capitalized in the following paragraph:

It is conceded . . . that the avowal even, of faith in the principle of Woman Suffrage, would handicap the party most seriously.

In accordance with Rule 3 was this direction touching a Report on Education:

Spell “report” with capital R, when it refers to this Report; l. c. [lower-case] in other cases.

Presidential, imperial, kingly, ducal, etc., titles are put down when used generally, but are put up when applied to persons. In the following example “an emperor” is down, while “the Emperor” is put up.

The events which now took place in the interior of Germany were such as usually happened when either the throne was without an emperor, or the Emperor without a sense of his imperial dignity.—Schiller’s Thirty Years’ War.

Beginning with President Washington and including President Harrison, the United States has had twenty-three presidents.

4. Names and appellations of the Supreme Being should be capitalized.

We forbear inserting a list of the sacred names, too often written and uttered “in vain.” The reader is probably {p177} familiar with them from listening to Sabbath services, and reading religious books with which, we hope, his library abounds.

The word “providence” should be put down or up, according to its meaning, as may be seen in the two following sentences:

But behold now another providence of God; a ship came into the harbor. . . . This ship had store of English beads and some knives.—New England’s Memorial.

The world was all before them, where to choose

Their place of rest, and Providence their guide.—Milton.

Nouns ordinarily common become proper when written as names of the Supreme Being.

I hope my merciful Judge will bear in mind my heavy punishment on earth.—Pickwick Papers, ch. 44.

Emerson refers “all productions at last to an aboriginal Power.”—Century Maga.

Plato said, that in all nations certain minds dwell on the “fundamental Unity,” and “lose all being in one Being.”—Ib.

In the above examples, the effect of capitals in conveying the idea of personality is strikingly illustrated.

Pronouns referring to the Deity are not usually put up,—excepting the personals “He,” “Him.”

O thou, whose justice reigns on high.—Watts.

O thou, Most High—Ps. 56 : 2.

Father of all mercies, we, thine unworthy servants, do give thee most humble and hearty thanks for all thy goodness.—Common Prayer.

Thou, whose, thine, thy, properly lower-case.

Usage is ununiform as to capitalizing the pronoun of the third person, when referring to the Deity; some using the capital in all three cases (He, His, Him), while others capitalize the nominative and objective, and put “his” down; and still others put all the cases down.

God does love us. As any loving father or mother, He wants us to want His society, and to love to be with and talk with Him.—Congregationalist.

Small letter in the possessive, capital in the objective: {p178}

All the works of God . . . declare the glory of his perfections. . . . But how gross are the conceptions generally entertained of the character of Him “in whom we live and move!”

Dick. Improv’t Soc. § VI.

All the cases down:

. . . They can know but little . . . of that happiness which God has prepared for them that love him; but . . . this suffices them, that they shall see him as he is, etc. . . . the expectation founded upon his own gracious promise, etc.—Rev. John Newton’s Sermon on the “happy recovery” of King George (modern reprint).

But, whatever the style of the office, there is one category in which the personal pronoun must be capitalized: it is when no antecedent is expressed. Such cases are not of infrequent occurrence. If one were to write—

In all her troubles this good lady never failed to express her confidence in the care of him in whom she had put her trust—

the meaning would be doubtful; “him” might refer to some humane relative, or to the superintendent of the almshouse. But if the sentence were written—

. . . this good lady never failed to express her confidence in the care of Him in whom, etc.—

the meaning—that the Deity is intended—becomes clear.

Adjuncts qualifying names applied to Deity usually require no capitals:

For when we consider ourselves as the creatures of God . . . what can induce us to love, fear, and trust Him, as our God, our Father, and all-sufficient Friend and Helper.—

Mason’s Self-Knowledge.

Here “all-sufficient” is properly put down; as are also “great” and “common” in the following paragraph:

Not only honor and justice, and what I owe to man is my interest; but gratitude also, acquiescence, resignation, adoration, and all I owe to this great polity, and its great Governor our common Parent.—Harris. {p179}

But many cases occur where the adjective is properly put up; especially if the adjective itself denotes sacredness, as the following examples show:

Klopstock . . . suffers himself to forget that the [French] revolution itself is a process of the Divine Providence.—

Coleridge Biog. Lit.

Among the greater number of pagan nations, the most absurd and grovelling notions are entertained respecting the Supreme Intelligence, and the nature of that worship which his perfections demand.—Dick.

We are apt to entertain narrow conceptions of the Divine Nature.—Addison.

The words “Christian” and “Christianity” the best usage puts up; nor does there seem to be any good reason why “christianize” should not also be capitalized.

There are instances where the word “divine,” though referring to sacred personages, should not be put up; as—

If Christ did not hold this key, how is He divine?—

Congregationalist.

The words “godly,” “godfather,” “godmother” are put down: Webster has “godspeed,” and says it is “written also as two separate words, as in 2 John 10.” Worcester does not admit the phrase as one word in his defining columns, but prints it as two, under the word “God”; quoting the same text as Webster. The Congressional Record, 50th Congress, uses capital and hyphen, thus: “God-speed”; and this form is adopted by Abbot Bassett, the talented editor of the L. A. W. Bulletin, in his Farewell to former Chief Consul Hayes:

Take now the hand we so often have shaken,
Speak from our feelings so hard to subdue,
Send him in joyfulness out from our circle,
Give him a hearty God-speed and adieu.

Still Webster’s style of one word, lower-case, is, we think, preferable, and most used.

The word “gospel” when used generally,—in the sense of good tidings,—should be down; as “Woe is me, if I {p180} preach not the gospel.” But when used as part of a title to a specific book, it goes up; as “The Gospel according to St. Matthew”; “The Apocryphal Gospel of St. Thomas”; “The Gospel of St. Luke.”

5. Names of ancient Greek and Roman divinities, and of all pagan and heathen gods, should be put up.

When the word “god” or “goddess” is applied to a paganic divinity, it is put down. This remark and our Rule 5 are both exemplified in Darwin’s lines,—

First two dread snakes, at Juno’s vengeful nod,

Climbed round the cradle of the sleeping god.

Botanic Garden.

So, also, 1 Kings 11 : 33:

Worshipped Ashtoreth the goddess of the Zidonians, Chemosh the god of the Moabites, and Milcom the god of the children of Ammon.

The names applied to evil spirits should be put up:

And Satan came also among them.—Job 1 : 6.

Then Apollyon said unto Christian, “Here will I spill thy soul.”—Bunyan.

During a violent thunderstorm, the converted Chinese steward disappeared. The captain found him below, making prostrations before a gilded image. “How is this?” demanded the astonished captain; “I thought you were a Christian.” The Chinaman replied, “Your God velly well, fine weather; stolm like this, want Joss.”

In the above example, the objects of Christian and pagan worship are properly capitalized.

From the foregoing remarks, etc., especially under Rule 4, it will be perceived that capitalization is, in the department of theology as in all others, mostly regulated by office style. But in forming a style, the above rules and examples may be found serviceable.

6. The pronoun I, and the interjection O, should always be put up. {p181}

I scarcely knew how long I had sat there when I became aware of a recognition.

Praise the Lord, O my soul.—Ps. cxlvi.

But in Latin the “O” is frequently put down.

Huc ades, ô formosa puer.—Virgil.

Adestes o Maria, o Angele, o Patroni castitatis meæ.—

Libellus Precum, Georgiopoli, D.C.

7. Some words which are put down when spelled in full, are put up when contracted.

The Dr. called upon me. Need I say, I regretted the happiness of seeing the doctor?

“Patent-office, number 16” may be written, “Patent-office, No. 16.”

The honorable the Secretary of the Navy.

The Hon. the Secretary of the Navy.

But certain suffixes, whether spelled in full or contracted, are put up or down, or in small caps, capitalized, according to the style of the words to which they are suffixed; as, for instance, the words “junior” and “esquire,” which are put one degree less in dignity than the words to which they are attached; as:

John Smith, jr., esq., [or “junior, esquire.”]

The person’s name being lower-case capitalized, “jr.” and “esq.” are put down.

JOHN DOE, Jr. Esq., [or “Junior, Esquire.”]

The names being small caps, capitalized, the “jr.” and “esq.” are put up.

RICHARD ROE, JR. ESQ., [or “JUNIOR, ESQUIRE.”]

The names being in capitals, the suffixes are capitals and small capitals.

But “D.D.” “LL.D.” “M.D.” etc., are put in large or small capitals according to office style, or a style adapted for the work in which they appear: as— {p182}

John Doe, LL.D.; RICHARD ROE, PH.D.; J. SMITH, M.D.; ABEL MONEY, F.R.S.

Words connected with a number of designation are often put up,—and this is the better way. So, though the words “Bay,” “Dock,” etc., in the following examples may properly be put down if the office style require it, yet the unfettered compositor and reader will prefer to put up those, and all words similarly placed; as:

The planks of Bay No. 6 on Chelsea Bridge have been replaced by ordinary boards purchased at Dock No. 8.

We arrived at Station 16, and proceeded thence through Lock 12 to Dam No. 8.

8. Names of persons, of things personified, of nations, countries, cities, towns, streets, ships, etc., should be put up.

Capt. Samuel Jones sailed in ship Minerva, from Sandy Hook to Tanjong Bolus, the most southerly point of the continent of Asia.

A charming and spirituelle Frenchwoman said of Julius Mohl, that Nature, in forming his character, had skimmed the cream of the three nationalities to which he belonged by birth, by adoption, and by marriage; making him “deep as a German, spirituel as a Frenchman, and loyal as an Englishman.”—Atlantic Monthly.

Charles, Susan, William, Henrietta Matilda, Benjamin Harrison Smith, come in, this minute!

Under this rule proper adjectives may also be classed; as:

The French and American Claims Commission.

He is familiar with the German, French, Russian, Bengalee, Chinese, and Grebo languages.

Is the Monroe doctrine heartily concurred in by European nations?

Names of political parties should be put up.

Democrat, Democratic, Democracy, Republican, Republicanism, Woman-Suffragists, Women’s Rights party, Locofocos, Whigs, Tories, Free-Soilers, Liberals, Independents, etc. {p183}

But when any of these words are used in a general sense, they should be put down; as:

Whatever requires to be done by slow and cautious degrees does not accord with the spirit of democracy.—De Staël.

The tendency of some European nations is toward republicanism.

The words “state” and “territory” applied to political divisions of the United States should be put up; as:

The State of North Dakota. The Territory of Utah.

This State gave a Republican majority.

Some nouns and adjectives originally proper have, by usage, the common form; as:

We sell silver, china, and iron wares.

There is great demand for india-rubber goods.

His pets are guinea-pigs and guinea-hens.

That maltese cat follows her everywhere.

He wears russia-leather boots, morocco gaiters, and a fez cap when dancing the german.

The burglars secured six german silver spoons.

Numbers are denoted by roman capitals or arabic figures.

There are some words yet on debatable ground. It is safe to write “plaster of Paris” or “plaster of paris.” The latter form is well enough for so common an article, and should be preferred by compositors.

Some words which are put up when alone, are put down when they coalesce with a preposition; as:

I crossed the Atlantic to view transatlantic countries.

The transpacific people are apt merchants.

But some write “inter-State,” “cis-Platine,” “trans-Atlantic,” “cis-Padane,” “cis-Alpine,” etc. We know of no good authority for such work. It has no countenance from our lexicographers: and the hyphen and capital in the middle of the words are needless deformities.

NOTE. The “etc.” in Rule 7 is like one spoken of by Coke (an “etc.” of Littleton, I am told), “full of {p184} excellent meaning.” Descending from the name of a continent to the designations “beat,” “precinct,” “alley”; or ascending from “wharf,” “alley” to the name of a continent, through lessening or increasing subdivisions, the line must be drawn somewhere between what is to be put up and what is to be put down. Just where the line is drawn between capital and lower-case initials, between the aristocrats of the page and hoi polloi, is of very little consequence; but as uniformity in a work is desirable while proof-readers are liable to differ, it is as important to have an umpire in a proof-room as it is on a base-ball ground. And as capitalization is wholly arbitrary, the essential qualities of an umpire are, that he shall have a good memory, so as not to overset to-day the decisions of yesterday, and a strong will of his own, which shall not allow any obstinate reader to step across the important imaginary line which separates the ups from the downs,—the majuscules from the minuscules.

If a printing-office requires the services of but one reader, he, happy man, can suit himself, even though reasonably sure that he will suit nobody else—so various and set are the opinions of men on matters of trifling moment. If, however, two readers are employed, and on the same work, the one with the best judgment should be allowed to decide all doubtful points; but in this case, as in matrimonial life, the question as to which has the best judgment, is usually decided, if not by the strongest will, by the will of the party most reckless of consequences. But in proof-reading, any point in dispute is usually so trifling, that the readers can call in the office-boy, technically called printer’s —— but we were once youngest apprentice ourself, and choose to forget the word,—and let him settle it; whereas, in matrimonial life it is a different Agency with a similar name who is generally called in, and “by decision more embroils the fray.” {p185}

To show the absurdity of supposing that good readers will not differ in the use of capitals, we once wrote a paragraph, and gave an exact copy to each of two skilled proof-readers, desiring them to capitalize it as they thought it should be capitalized if about to go to press. We will here give the paragraph as we wrote it—without regard to rules—and then exhibit their corrections, etc., in parallel columns:

Mr. Quilp lives on a wharf which is connected by an alley with a city reservation in beat 17, precinct 8, ward 14. Said reservation is called poplar square; an avenue, known as chestnut avenue, connects that square with Washington street; and Washington street is a thoroughfare connecting the Snowhill division of Junction city with the city of Boomerang, the capital of the state of Cherokee—a state just admitted to the union, and to all the privileges of this happy nation, the United States of America,—the foremost republic of the western hemisphere.

That the differences and agreements in capitalizing may be readily observed, the two returned copies, as left by their respective readers, are printed below, side by side.

READER A. | READER B.

Mr. Quilp lives on a wharf which is connected by an alley with a city reservation in beat 17, precinct 8, ward 14. Said reservation is called Poplar square; an avenue, known as Chestnut avenue, connects that square with Washington street; and Washington street is a thoroughfare connecting Snowhill division of Junction City with the city of Boomerang, the capital of the State of Cherokee—a State just admitted to the Union, and to all the privileges of this happy nation, the United States of America—the foremost republic of the western hemisphere.

Mr. Quilp lives on a wharf which is connected by an alley with a city reservation in Beat 17, Precinct 8, Ward 14. Said reservation is called Poplar Square; an avenue, known as Chestnut avenue, connects that square with Washington street; and Washington street is a thoroughfare connecting Snowhill division of Junction City with the city of Boomerang, the capital of the State of Cherokee—a State just admitted to the Union, and to all the privileges of this happy nation, the United States of America—the foremost republic of the Western Hemisphere.

One of these styles may be just as good as the other (see chapter on “Style”); but whichever were selected, should be strictly adhered to, through the whole book or work to which it was deemed applicable. Had the above paragraph been given to still a third reader, very likely he would have capitalized “Division,” as being of more consequence than a beat or a ward; another would have deemed “Precinct” worthy of being put up, while “beat” would have been placed in the small-letter obscurity of “wharf” and “alley.” Another would say that localities designated by a number should always be put up; as “Beat 6,” “Station A” (See closing remark and examples, under Rule 7). The words “street” and “avenue” are left down by both the above readers. The Atlantic Monthly puts those words up,—“The junction of Beacon Street and Brookline Avenue”; the Century magazine has “Canal street, its former upper boundary”; Harper’s Maga. speaks of “the old house in St. Louis Street in which,” etc. Each office makes its own style.

The word “city” in “Junction City” is put up,—the two words forming the city’s name. Whether to print “New York City” or “New York city” is a moot point,—at present a matter of style. Some insist that as ocean, sea, city, street, etc., are common nouns, they so remain when connected with a proper adjective, and should be put down,—and from this starting-point they have endeavored to frame a general, and at the same time practical, rule for capitalizing common nouns, which, when described by proper adjectives, form parts of individual names. But, judging from our experience in proof-reading, the endeavor has thus far been unsuccessful. The adjective, the {p187} distinguishing word, always begins with a capital; as in “Bristol county,” “Atlantic ocean.” The rule then, formulated, amounts to this: “Put the distinguishing word up, and the class name down.” But usage will not allow this; we must not write “Long island,” “James smith,”—wherefore the rule has this qualification: “If the distinguishing word alone does not clearly designate the object, both words must be put up.” This qualification virtually annuls the rule,—for different minds have different opinions as to whether the object is, or is not, “clearly designated.” Reader A writes “Poplar square,” while Reader B writes “Poplar Square.” Under the rule and qualification, mentioned above, we have set before us, as correct examples, “Hudson river, Red River”; as if the significance of such prefixes as “red, swift, narrow, deep,” could not be determined by the insertion or omission of the article a, of which we shall speak farther on,—but must be made by capitalizing “river.” But admitting that the capitalizing of “River” more clearly designates the object, we doubt whether any printer or reader would wittingly pass one “river” down, and another “River” up, in the same work; and the average writer and reader for the press can hardly be supposed to take much time to study whether a given river or city or square is just within or outside of the limit of “clear designation.” Among the proof-readers of a certain large work on geography, which seems to have been carefully read, there must have been some difference of opinion on this point; for it speaks of “the bay of Biscay” and “the Gulf of Mexico”; and the “Atlantic ocean” of Vol. 1, becomes the “Atlantic Ocean” of Vol. 2. And such discrepancies must appear in every work which is printed under {p188} the rule “Put the object down and the distinguishing word up—with exceptions,” unless the exceptions are mentioned individually, seriatim, and a list of the same given to all employees who are expected to set type and read proof under such rule.

The objection to putting the class name down, is not so much that the distinguishing word alone ever fails to “clearly designate the object,” as that usage in many instances, and a sense of personal dignity in others, prevent all family and many other class names from sinking into lower-case. It were—there being no usage in its favor—a shame to print “Andrew Jackson” with a little “j,” although the distinguishing word “Andrew” would clearly designate the individual intended. “We sailed past Long island” could not possibly be mistaken for “We sailed past a long island.” In conversation the mere omission of the article a would clearly indicate that we had a particular island in view, and what island it was, even if we were not to inform an interlocutor, that, were we to print our remark we should capitalize the “L,” and very possibly the “I.”

“We sailed on a red river,”—it may have been the Raritan, or any other river running among iron ore; or it may have been any one of the twelve streams of the United States which bear each the name “Red river”; the article a, as Murray observes, “determines the object spoken of to be one single thing of a kind, leaving it still uncertain which.” “It is,” says Murray further, “an excellence of the English language,” that, “by means of its two articles it does most precisely determine the extent of signification of common names.” By the omission of the article a, then, a particular river is “most precisely determined,”—and, in print, {p189} capitalizing the “R” of the adjective makes assurance doubly sure. But since long-established usage determines that “Long Island,” “Harper’s Ferry,” “Lake Ontario,” “George Washington,” etc., shall have both words put up, uniformity can be secured only by extending that mode of capitalization to all words in the same category—unless, as we have intimated, each exception be mentioned individually, so that every printer may “clearly designate” (so to speak) what is expected of him.

9. A word usually put down may be put up, or vice versa, by reason of propinquity to some other word which is in the opposite category as to capitalization.

We are not aware that this rule, or an equivalent to it, has been formulated until now, but we have known changes in capitalizing to be made in compliance with the principle of the rule.

A printed report (Reform School) reads:

The visitors were cordially received and welcomed by the Superintendent and matron of the Board of Trustees.

The style required that, usually, “Superintendent” should be up, and “Matron” down, as printed above. But when the words are so near each other, the small m looks—without regard to the maxim, Place aux dames—as if the lady were subjected to an intentional slight. We think it had been better thus:

The visitors were cordially . . . welcomed by the Superintendent and the Matron of the Board of Trustees.

By the way, this insertion of the before “Matron” shows that the Matron was not also the Superintendent—thus illustrating Murray’s remark on the “two articles,” mentioned near the close of the note under Rule 8, ante. {p190}

This clause also occurs:

Friends of the school residing in the city and District.

Here “city” is put down, as if of less consequence than the outlying parts of the “District” [of Columbia].

That is correct, according to usual office style; but had “city” been put up, or “district” down, it would have been more pleasing to the eye, and would not, probably, have wrought any mischief. In the use of capitals, rules should be, and in fact are, very bendable. When we write “the member of Congress,” member is down, though we capitalize “the Delegate from the Territory of Blank.” But when “Member and Delegate” occur in the same sentence, both words are put up, agreeably to Rule 9.

It is a good rule adopted in some printing-offices, that where the same appellation is given to several persons or public bodies, only the highest in rank shall be honored with capitals.

For instance, in speaking of the highest tribunal in the land, put up “the Supreme Court”; but if a State court is spoken of put the initials down, thus,—“the supreme court of Minnesota,” as in the following paragraph:

This view of the law was sustained by the supreme court of Louisiana, and, upon writ of error, by the Supreme Court of the United States (Day vs. Micou, 18 Wall., 156).

So, also, “the Chief Justice of the United States Supreme Court”—capitals; “the chief justice of the supreme court of Maryland”—lower-case; the highest “Commissioner” in any Governmental Department, up; a road commissioner, down. A steady adherence to this rule might aid students and others to discriminate between the “Governor” of a State and the “governor” of a family; and if a decision is rendered by “the full bench of the Supreme Court,” one would know that no appeal could be had,—while if a decision is made by “the supreme court,” it might, perhaps, be carried up on appeal.

But this distinction can never be fully carried out. We have known it to be set aside by the following direction {p191} marking out a “special style” for a volume of “Decisions”: “Capitalize Supreme Court, Court of Claims, Circuit Court, District Court, and Supreme Court of Tennessee.” Besides, Great Men are inimical to small letters. The President of a Village Lyceum insists on being put up as high as the President of the United States,—in fact, the said president may feel that he is “a biger man” than the President.

And if, on the other hand, as some proof-readers have contended, capitalization should be employed to distinguish, in print, our Government from every foreign Government, the effect would be almost too ridiculous to state; as:

The Chief Executive of the United States had an interview with the chief executive of Mexico. The President said to the president, “How do you do?”—and the president replied, “I am better than ever I was before, for I see the President of the Great Colossus of the North.”—“And I,” rejoined the President, “am delighted with the honor of conversing with the great colossus of the south.” Here the president bowed to the President, and the President shook the president’s hand. The One then took his Oysters on the Half-Shell, and the other his oysters on the half-shell.

The style was once verging toward something very ridiculous, and might have proceeded to the above extreme had not a distinguished Secretary of State, several years ago, made some well-timed suggestions.

If the office style require “board,” “bureau,” etc., referring to a corporation, or collection of individuals, to be put down, cases like the following should form exceptions:

The festive board was graced by the festive board of directors of the Rochester saw-mills.

It should be printed “Board of Directors.”

A new bureau has been forwarded to the new bureau of musical notation.

Put up “Bureau of Musical Notation.”

Thus, by a judicious selection and arrangement of capital and lower-case letters, Boards and Bureaus of gentlemen may {p192} be readily differentiated from mere furniture, mahogany or black-walnut boards and bureaus.

The principle of a change of style by reason of juxtaposition, is recognized in the following direction for printing an important work on the fisheries: “Put quantities, measurements, distances, and sums of money in figures; numbers of men and vessels spelled, except where large numbers occur together.”

RECAPITULATION.

In the preceding part of this chapter we felt it necessary to give many examples, and enter upon some discussion of styles. To save time and trouble in turning many leaves to find some particular rule, we give below, all the rules in compact form, with but brief, if any, examples in illustration.

RULE I. The initial letter of every sentence should be a capital.

This rule has been long established. It scarcely requires an example.

RULE II. The first letter in every line of poetry should be a capital.

What though my wingèd hours of bliss have been

Like angel-visits, few and far between.—Campbell.

RULE III. Principal words in the titles of books, of important documents, of proclamations, of edicts, of conventions, and words of especial distinction in monographs, should be put up.

There is in the library a book entitled, “An Interesting Narrative of the Travels of James Bruce, Esq., into Abyssinia, to Discover the Source of the Nile.” {p193}

RULE IV. Names and appellations of the Supreme Being should be capitalized.

RULE V. Names of ancient Greek and Roman divinities, and of all pagan and heathen gods, should be put up.

Æsculapius restored many to life, of which Pluto complained to Jupiter, who struck Æsculapius with thunder, but Apollo, angry at the death of his son, killed the Cyclops who made the thunderbolts.—Lempriere.

RULE VI. The pronoun I, and the interjection O, should always be put up.

Here am I; send me, O king!

RULE VII. Some words which are put down when spelled in full, are put up when contracted.

The honorable the Secretary of the Treasury.

The Hon. the Secretary of the Treasury.

RULE VIII. Names of persons, of things personified, of nations, countries, cities, towns, streets, ships, etc., should be put up.

And well may Doubt, the mother of Dismay,

Pause at her martyr’s tomb.—Campbell.

RULE IX. A word usually put down may be put up, or vice versa, by reason of propinquity to some other word which is in the opposite category as to capitalization.

The Secretary of War complimented the Secretary of the Typographical Union, upon his skill with the shooting-stick.

Shall the Choctaw Nation or this Nation adjust the northern boundary? {p194}

Before leaving the subject of capitalization, we must observe that there is diversity among authors and printers in regard to the use of capitals when two or more questions occur in succession. The rule generally given is, “Capitalize each question”: but the exceptions are so numerous, depending on some common relation to a term expressed or understood (see Obs. 30 and 31, Rule 29, Chap. V., ante), that we forbear indorsing the rule to which we have above referred. Indeed, it often happens that questions occurring singly are so connected with what goes before, that they do not require to be capitalized. Each case must be settled by the judgment of editor or author,—there is no common standard of reference, as can easily be shown by comparing different editions of the same work. In Buckingham’s Shakspeare, printed in Boston, we read in As you Like It, Act 5, Sc. 2:

Orl. Is’t possible that on so little acquaintance you should like her? . . . And will you persever, etc.,

the last question having a capital A; but in the London edition of French & Co., we have—

Orl. Is’t possible that on so little acquaintance you should like her? . . . and will you persever, etc.,

in which the last of the several questions has a lower-case a. Every editor endeavors to capitalize correctly—by suiting himself.

CHAPTER VIII. OLD STYLE.

Fonts of movable Types, from their firſt Introduion into England until late in the eighteenth Century, contained—owing principally to the long “ſ” (= s) then in Uſe—far more Ligatures than the Fonts of the preſent Day. Johnſon’s Diionary furniſhes a Liſt which we here inſert, with their more modern Equivalents:

= ct; ſ = s; ſb = sb; ſh = sh; ſi = si; ſk = sk; ſſ = ss; ſt = st; ſſi = ssi; ſſl = ssl: and in italic, = ct; ſ = s; ſb = sb; ſh = sh; ſk = sk; ſſ = ss; ſt = st; ſſi = ssi; ſſl = ssl.

It was our good Fortune, at a very early Period of Life, to attend a dame School, where a Book, printed in Glaſgow, in the Year 1756, was put into our Hands. This Book contained the Weſtminſter Larger and Shorter Catechiſms, and a Direory of Public Worſhip,—the Intention perhaps being to teach us good Engliſh and ſound “Kirk” Dorines at the ſame Time. Fortunately or otherwiſe, the Dorines were above our Comprehenſion at that Time; but the long ſ ’s and the Ligatures {p196} became Part of our Eye-Vernacular (if we may be pardoned for ſuch an Expreſſion), at which we rejoice. We hope that the Young who have not had the Advantages of antique Catechiſms will peruſe the Old Style Pages of this Chapter until they become ſo familiar with ancient and nearly forgotten Letters as to be able to enjoy the many good Things to be found in old-time Books, whether printed in Glaſgow or elſewhere.

To Printers who have “ſerved their Time” in the Book-offices of the Eaſt or the early ſettled Cities of the South and Weſt, a Chapter like this may ſeem wholly ſuperfluous. But in a Country like ours, where new Towns and Cities are daily ſpringing into Exiſtence, daily Newſpapers ſpringing up with them, it often happens that Boys and young Men who have had but ſcanty Schooling are taken as Apprentices to learn the Art of Arts. Many of theſe become rapid and corre Compoſitors, and in Proceſs of Time drift to Cities where are Printing-offices with more Varieties of Type than the new Comers have been accuſtomed to,—among the reſt, Old Style, both in its ancient and modernized Forms; and it is, in good Part, for the Benefit of theſe that we devote a few Pages to Old Style.

In purſuing our Subje we ſhall paſs by {p197} Caxton, who, as Everybody knows, introduced movable Types into England in the ſeventh Year of the fourth Edward, make but brief Mention of Caſlon (1692–1766), who about the Year 1720, made Matrices and call genuine and beautiful old-ſtyle Type,—and come direly to the Fa that, in 1843, an Engliſh Printer deſired to reprint in Old Style a Book of the Time of Charles II. The old Matrices of Caſlon were found (v. Brit. Encyc.), and from them a Font was caſt, which, with improved Preſſes, etc., gave a better Impreſſion than had been obtained in Caſlon’s Time. Since then (1843), the Demand for Old Style has ſteadily increaſed, both in England and America, and our Founders have produced a modernized Old Style; in which, however, it is thought by many that Legibility has been ſacrificed to Beauty and general Effe. Our Purpoſe here is to treat of the earlier Style, which ſtill reaches Printing-offices occaſionally as Copy, and in which Programmes for “Old Folks’ Concerts,” and alſo ſome Pamphlets, are printed even in theſe Days.

In Old Style, s final is a ſhort s; in all other Parts of a Word, even if it is the laſt Letter of a Syllable of a Word divided at the End of a Line, the long, kerned “ſ” is uſed. To prevent breaking the Kern the long “ſ” was caſt in the ſame {p198} Matrix with ſuch Letters as it would otherwiſe interfere with,—the two, or in Caſe of double ſ the three, Letters forming one Type; juſt as “f” is now ligated to other Letters, as fi, ffl, etc.

And here, while ſpeaking of Ligatures, we would fain digreſs a Moment,—even at the Expenſe of lengthening our old-ſtyle Chapter,—to remark that there are ſome interfering Combinations for which Ligatures have not been caſt. We have ſeen Book-catalogues in which the Word “Illuſtrated” frequently occurred, having the Kerns of the italic I and its Neighbor l, one or both, broken off. The ſame happens when the Word “Illinois” is ſet in italic, unleſs the Compoſitor inſert a thin Space to keep the Letters from encroaching on each other’s Territory. The ſame Method muſt be obſerved when the Combination of f with b, h, or k, is met with; as in Hofburg, Hofhoof, and Hoffkirchen; otherwiſe one or more Letters will preſent a mutilated Appearance on the Proof-ſheet.

An italic ſhort s ligated with t, formerly in Uſe, does not ſeem to have remained long in the Printer’s Caſe; but—perhaps from the Beauty of its Curves—the “,” both in roman and italic, retains its Popularity, and is found in Fonts of modernized Old Style which have rejeed the long ſ and its Ligatures. Indeed, we have what are {p199} called “ Books,” in which the deſignating Term is uſed as though it were as needful as “fi,” and the other Combinations of the kerned Letter f.

We conclude this Portion of our Work by preſenting ſome Fac-ſimiles of Old Style, produced by Photogravure. The firſt is Part of a Page from “Annals of King George,” printed in London, in 1717.

The next is a Fac-ſimile of four roman and three italic Lines from T. B. Reed’s “Hiſtory of Printing.” Theſe ſeven Lines were printed from Type caſt in the Matrices made by the elder Caſlon, in 1720. They ſhow an immenſe Improvement when compared with the Page of the “Annals” executed but three Years before.

The third Sample is from Fry & Steele’s “Specimens of Printing Type,” dated 1794; while the fourth, from the Foundry of Caſlon the younger, dated 1796, having dropped the long “ſ” and its Ligatures, informs us of the Period when the Old was giving Place to the New. {p200}

The above is a fac-simile from the second volume of Annals of George I.; London, 1717.

OLD STYLE
Facsimile of four roman and three italic lines from T. B. Reed’s “History of Printing”, printed in type cast in the matrices made by the elder Caslon in 1720.

SMALL PICA ROMAN. NO. 1.
Facsimile of ten lines from Fry & Steele’s “Specimens of Printing Type”, dated 1794.

Small Pica Roman. No. 1.
Facsimile of ten lines from the Foundry of Caslon the younger, dated 1796.

CHAPTER IX. TECHNICAL TERMS USED IN THIS WORK.

CASE. A frame divided into boxes, or compartments, for holding types. The upper case contains capitals; the lower case, small letters.

CHAPEL. An association of workmen in a printing-office.

CHASE. An iron frame in which the pages of matter are locked up.

DOUBLET. A portion of a take repeated by the compositor. For instance: “It is of no use to lament our misfortunes, of no benefit to grieve over past mistakes.” Suppose the compositor to have set up as far as the second “no” inclusive,—he then glances at his copy for the following words, but his eye catches the first “no,” and he resets what is already in his stick. Of course the proof will read thus: “It is of no use to lament our misfortunes, of no use to lament our misfortunes, of no benefit to grieve over,” etc.

FORM. The pages of matter inclosed in the chase.

GALLEY. A frame which receives the contents of the composing-stick. When the stick is full, it is emptied upon a galley.

IMPOSE. To lay the made-up pages of matter on the stone, and fit on the chase in order to carry the form to press.

INDENTION. The blank space at the beginning of a common paragraph, or of a line of poetry, etc. When the first line is not indented, while the following lines of the paragraph have a blank space before them, the paragraph is said to be set with a “hanging indention.”

Specimen of Hanging Indention.

Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives, in General Court assembled, and by the authority of the same.

JUSTIFY. To insert spaces between the words of a line of type, so that the line shall exactly fit the width of the stick.

To LOCK UP A FORM is to drive quoins (wedges) in such a manner as to hold the type firmly in the chase.

To MAKE UP is to adjust the matter in pages of equal length, as nearly as may be, for imposition.

MATTER. Types set up, so as to form a word or words. When it is to be distributed (put back into the cases), it is known as “dead” matter. If not yet printed, or if destined for further use, it is called “live” matter.

OUT. A portion of a take, accidentally omitted by a compositor. An “out” is generally referable, as in the case of the “doublet,” to the recurrence of some word, or sequence of letters. For instance: a take had in it, “He injured his foot, by wearing a tight boot.” The proof had, only, “He injured his foot.” The compositor had the whole sentence in his mind; and having set the final letters “oot,” referred these to the last word, “boot,” and thought he had set the whole sentence.

QUÆRE, or QUERY, variously abbreviated, as Qu. Qy. or Qr., and sometimes represented by an interrogation point, is written in the margin of the proof-sheet, to draw the author’s attention to some passage about which the proof-reader is in doubt.

REVISE. The second proof is a revise of the first, the third is a revise of the second, etc. To REVISE is to compare the second, or any subsequent proof, with a preceding one, to see whether the proper corrections have been made.

SHOOTING-STICK. A wedge-shaped piece of wood for tightening and loosening the quoins that wedge up the pages in a chase.

SIGNATURE. A letter or figure at the bottom of the first page of every sheet. It denotes the proper order of the sheets in binding.

SPACE. If a line of type be divided by vertical planes into exact squares, each of these squares occupies the space of an em, or em-quadrat. Ems are used to indent common paragraphs, and to separate sentences in the same paragraph. {p204} The next thinner space is the en, or en-quadrat, which is one-half of the em. The next is one-third of the em, and is called the three-em space; next, one-fourth of the em is the four-em space; then, one-fifth of the em is the five-em space. Thinner than any of these is the hair-space. The three-em space is generally used in composition; the other sizes are needed in justifying.

STICK (COMPOSING-STICK). A frame of iron or steel, in which the compositor sets up the type. By means of a movable slide, it can be adjusted to the required length of line.

STONE. A table of marble, or other stone, on which forms are imposed, and on which they are placed for correction.

TAKE. That portion of copy which the compositor takes to put in type (or “set up”) at one time.

CHAPTER X.

VARIOUS SIZES OF ROMAN LETTER—MODERN.

VARIOUS SIZES OF ROMAN LETTER—OLD STYLE.

INDEX.

- Abbreviated words, how punctuated, 80.

- Abbreviations, Catalogue of fishes, 68.

- Abbreviations, mischievous, 26.

- Abbreviations of States, Territories, Post-offices, 69.

- “able,” words ending in, 155–164.

- Accents, 121.

- Acute accent, 121.

- Adams’ or Adams’s, 94.

- Advertisement, Publishers’, 5–7.

- Aldus Manutius, 75.

- Alterations on Proof-sheet, 30.

- Ancient and modern methods of punctuation compared, 73–75.

- Apostrophe, 118–119.

- Attention to revising, 47.

- Authors’ proofs, 47–49.

- Authors should punctuate their MS., 71.

- Brace, The, 121.

- Brackets, 93, 94, 120.

- Briefs, Lawyers’, 24, 25.

- Bureau or Academy yet wanted to settle all difficulties in syntax orthography, punctuation, etc., 65.

- Bureau, Smithsonian, of the English Language, desiderated, 65, 127.

- Canceled words, how restored, 29.

- Capitalization, 171–194.

- Capitals and points, when to be mentioned by copy-holders, 45, 46, 55, 56.

- Capitals, Rules for use of, very flexible, 190.

- Captions, size of type, form of tables, etc., Directions for, furnished compositors and proof-readers, 37, 38.

- Caret, The, 121.

- Cedilla, The, 122.

- Chirography, Mercantile, 24, 26.

- Circumflex accent, 121.

- Close attention to revising, 47.

- Close pointing, 80.

- Colon, 97, 98.

- Comma between subject and predicate, 77–79.

- Comma, rules for use of, 100–112.

- Comma, use of, depending on taste in many cases, 80.

- Compositors and proof-readers punctuate, 36.

- Compositors and proof-readers should punctuate, if author neglects, 71.

- Compositors’ names on proofs, 46.

- Copy for printers, black ink on white paper, 31.

- Copy-holders’ duty, 41.

- Copy to be followed closely in doubtful cases, 123.

- Correcting proof-sheets, Marks used in, 43, 45.

- Correctly spelled list of doubtful words, Webster style, 127–140.

- Correctly spelled list of doubtful words, Worcester style, 141–154.

- Court, Records of, 51.

- Court, Transcripts of Records of, with extraneous documents, 25.

- Dash, the, 89–91.

- Dash, the, Rules for use of, 114–118.

- Dash, used too freely by writers for the press, 90.

- D.D., LL.D., M.D., 181, 182.

- Difficulty of drawing line between words “up” and words “down,” 183–189.

- “Directions” for style of any work, frequently consulted, 37.

- “Directions,” Samples of, 38–40.

- Discussion of various modes of spelling same word, 126.

- Distributing type, 33; results of error in, 34.

- Diversities of grammar and idiom—of orthography, etc., Smithsonian Institution might settle all controversies by Bureau of Language, whose rulings should be adopted in Governmental publications, 65.

- Division of words on vowels or syllables, 87, 88.

- Division of words—to be avoided or not, 89.

- Doubtful orthography; double column lists in dictionaries, 125, 126.

- Doubtful words, query to author or editor, 31.

- Dr. Johnson and proof-reader, 32.

- Duty of copy-holder, 41.

- Eccentricities of orthography, punctuation, capitalization, etc., recorded for reference by proof-reader, while a work is in progress, 37.

- ei and ie, Rule for, 169.

- Ellipsis, or Omission, Marks of, 121.

- Employé or Employee, 39.

- English Grammar defined, 72.

- Ensure and Insure differentiated, 170.

- Enure and Inure differentiated, 170.

- Erasures, to be made with ink, 29.

- Errors from mistakes in distributing, 34.

- Errors in MS. copy, corrected, or pointed out, in printing-office, 36.

- Errors,—marked in text, and correction denoted on margin, of proof-sheets, 41–45.

- Errors, rare, from printed copy, 18.

- Errors unavoidable, while present methods continue, 34.

- Esq., Jr., rules for, 181.

- Exclamation, note of, rules for use of, 113, 114.

- Fac-similes of Old Style, 200, 201.

- Faults of manuscript reappear in proof-sheets, 25.

- First letter in line of poetry, 174.

- First proof, specimen of, 44.

- Footnotes in manuscript, 30.

- Footnotes, references to, 123.

- Foreign words italic, 57, 58.

- Foreign words roman, 58.

- Full point, or period, 96.

- General remarks on incongruities of style, 66–70.

- Gods, pagan, capitalized, 180.

- Golden rule of punctuation, 77.

- Grammatical points, 72.

- Grave accent, 121.

- Greek alphabet, 54.

- Handwriting of Clergymen, 22, 23.

- Handwriting of lawyers, 23–25.

- Handwriting of mercantile and business men, 24, 26.

- Handwriting of physicians, 27.

- Heathen deities, names of, to be capitalized, 180.

- Hyphen, 118.

- Hyphens in one-half, two-thirds, etc., 87.

- Hyphens in succession at end of lines, not to exceed three, 89.

- Hyphens, use of, 84–89.

- I and J, 29.

- I and O, to be capitals, 180, 181.

- “ible,” words ending in, 165–167.

- Illegibility of the writing, no damages, on account of the, 15.

- Importance of a and the, 188.

- Initial letters put up, 172–174.

- Ink, black, on white paper, for press, 31.

- Insure and Ensure differentiated, 170.

- Interrogation, note of, rules for use of, 112, 113.

- Inure and Enure differentiated, 170.

- “ise,” words ending in, 168, 169.

- Junior, Esquire, rules for, 181.

- Juxtaposition influences use of capitals, 189.

- Language—“The Foundation for the Whole Faculty of Thinking”—should have the sharp oversight of those who would “diffuse knowledge among men,” 65.

- Last reading for press; careful, deliberate, etc., 49–51.

- Lawyers’ briefs, 24.

- Leaders, 121.

- Lead pencils, avoid, when writing for press, 31.

- Lead pencils, no erasure with, 28.

- Length of pause at the various points, 72, 73.

- Liberal pointing, 80.

- Ligated letters, Old Style, 195.

- Lines above and below a correction, to be compared when revising, 47.

- LL.D., D.D., M.D., 181, 182.

- Manuscript, faults of, reappear in proof-sheets, 25.

- Manuscript for the press,—black ink on white paper, 31.

- Manutii, The, 75; Manutius, Aldus, 75.

- “Mark-off,” 47.

- Marks of Ellipsis, or Omission, 121.

- Marks of Parenthesis, 120.

- Marks of Quotation, 119, 120.

- Marks used in correcting proof-sheets, 43, 45.

- Matter “off its feet,” 42.

- Meaning of “Put up” and “Put down,” 171, 172.

- M.D., LL.D., D.D., 181, 182.

- Mercantile chirography, 24, 26.

- Method of reading points, capitals, etc., 46.

- Mingling of styles, 40.

- Namely, viz., to wit, how punctuated, 82.

- Names of compositors on proofs, 46.

- Names of countries, states, ships, towns, streets, political parties, etc., capitalized, 182.

- Note of exclamation, rules for use of, 113, 114.

- Note of interrogation, rules for use of, 112, 113.

- Note on the “etc.,” in Rule 7, on use of capitals, 183–189.

- Note-references, 123.

- Notes as to captions, size of type, form of tables, etc., to be furnished employees, 38.

- Nouns ending in o, plurals of, 167, 168.

- O and I, capitals, 181.

- O, nouns ending in, 167, 168.

- “Off its feet,” 42.

- Old Style, 195–201.

- Omission, or Ellipsis, Marks of, 121.

- One correct spelling, according to Webster, of variously spelled words, 127–140.

- One correct spelling, according to Worcester, of variously spelled words, 141–154.

- One style for Governmental publications desiderated, 127.

- Orthography, 125–170.

- Orthography, definitions of, 125.

- Orthography; the Webster list of doubtful words (1500+), in the one preferred manner of spelling, 127–140.

- Orthography; the Worcester list of doubtful words (1500+), in the one preferred manner of spelling, 141–154.

- Over-punctuated manuscript, 30.

Pagination of MS., 29.

Paragraph mark (¶), 122.

Parenthesis, 92–94.

Parenthesis, marks of, 120.

Pauses and sense both indicated by punctuation, 75, 76.

Period, or full point, 96.

Personified things capitalized, 182.

Physicians’ chirography, 27.

Plurals, when denoted by apostrophe and s, 94, 95.

Pointing—close, liberal, 80.

Points, capitals, etc., method of reading by copy-holder, 46.

Points mark sense as well as pauses, 75, 76.

Possessive case of nouns singular ending in s, 94.

Preambles, resolves, and provisos, how punctuated, 81.

Preferred spelling, Webster’s, of 1500+ words of various orthography, 127–140.

Preferred spelling, Worcester’s, of 1500+ words of various orthography, 141–154.

Principal words capitalized, 175, 176.

Printers, usually best proof-readers, 35.

Professional men “at the case,” 36.

Proof-reader and Dr. Johnson, 32.

Proof-readers and compositors punctuate, 36.

Proof-reader, to query doubtful words, etc., 31.

Proof-reading, 33–58.

Proof-sheets, marks used in correcting, 43, 45.

Proof-sheets, numbered in regular sequence, 46.

Proof-sheets of Records of Court, 51.

Proof-sheets, second reading and revising of, 47.

Proofs, routine in regard to, 37.

Proper nouns, having common form, put down, 183.

Propinquity a reason for putting up or putting down, 189–192.

Provisos, preambles, and resolutions, how punctuated, 81.

Punctuation, 71–124; a modern art, 73.

Punctuation, ancient and modern methods of, 73–75.

Punctuation by compositor and proof-reader, 36.

Punctuation, by one reader only, 47.

Punctuation of viz., namely, to wit, 82.

Punctuation, rules of, not fixed, 75.

Punctuation, uniformity of, not attainable, 123.

“Put down” and “Put up,” meaning of, 171, 172.

- Quantity, marks of, 121, 122.

- Quotation marks, 119, 120.

- Reading final proof before printing, 49–51.

- Reading Greek, 53–56.

- Reading points and capitals, 46.

- Recapitulation of rules for right use of capitals, 192–194.

- Recipes—Greek and Latin, 27, 28.

- Records of Court, no alterations in, allowable, except clerical errors in punctuation, 51.

- Records of Court, transcripts of, with extraneous documents, 25.

- Records of Court, uniform style in, not to be sought at expense of departing from copy, 51.

- Reference marks to footnotes and sidenotes, 123.

- Resolutions, preambles, and provisos, how punctuated, 81.

- Restoring canceled words, 29.

- Revising, 47.

- Revising, in, great care required, 47.

- Rhetorical points, 72.

- Rules of punctuation, 96–118.

- Rules of punctuation not fixed, 75.

- Rules for capitalization very bendable, 190.

- Samples or directions and notes to printers, 38–40.

- Second proof, 46.

- Second reading of proof by copy, 47.

- Second, third, etc., revision of proof-sheets, 48.

- Section mark (§), 123.

- Semicolon, 98–100.

- Semicolon before as, when particulars follow a general statement, 82.

- Sense and pauses, both indicated by points, 75, 76.

- Sentences difficult and involved, compositor and proof-reader to follow copy carefully, 123, 124.

- Separation of words in manuscripts, 74.

- Size of type; captions; form of tables, etc., directions for, to be supplied, 38.

- Slips of proof, numbered in sequence, 46.

- Space before and after dash, 91.

- Spanish ñ, 122.

- Specimen of first proof, 44.

- “Spectator” of 1711 wished for an Academy to settle differences between grammar and idiom, 65.

- Spelling, errors in, silently corrected, 36.

- “Stet,” 29.

- Style, 59–65.

- Style of the office, 40.

- Style of writing in the fifth century, 74.

- Style, peculiarities of, to be noted by proof-reader, for reference, 37.

- Styles, mingling of, 40.

- Styles; Worcester, Webster, and Office, 61.

- Subject and predicate, no comma between, except to prevent ambiguity, 77–79.

- Suggestions to writers for press, 28.

- Supreme Being, names, etc., of, capitalized, 176–180.

- Syllabication, 87–89.

- Tables, form of; size of type; style of captions, etc., sometimes furnished to compositors and proof-readers, 38.

- Technical terms used in this book, 202–204.

- Tout-ensemble survey of a proof-sheet, 40.

- To wit, namely, viz., ending paragraph, how punctuated, 82.

- Two “Chapter V.’s,” 30.

- Type, how distributed, 34.

- Umlaut, 122.

- Uniformity—very important in some works, of no consequence in others, 52.

- Use of comma, in many cases, depends upon taste, 80.

- Varieties of style, 61–63.

- Various marks used in writing and printing, 118.

- Various sizes of type—modern, 205.

- Various sizes of type—old style, 205.

- Viz., namely, to wit; ending paragraph, how punctuated, 83.

- Viz., namely, to wit; how punctuated, 82.

- Webster’s preferred columns of words of doubtful orthography, 127–140.

- Worcester’s preferred columns of words of doubtful orthography, 141–154.

- Words connected with a No. of designation, 182.

- Words doubtful, query, 31.

- Words ending in able, 155–164; in ible, 165–167.

- Words ending in ise, 168, 169.

- Words from dead and foreign languages, 56–58.

- Words ending in cion, 169.

- Words l. c. when spelled in full, u. c. when contracted, 181.

- Words, not English, to be printed in italics, 57, 58.

- Words, not English, to be printed in roman, 58.

- Write plain English, 26.

- Writers for press should understand technics of proof-reading, 42.

- Writing, bad, robs compositors, 21–23.

- Writing becomes automatic, 19.

- Writing for the press, 15–32.

- Writing legibly, imperative, 21.

- Writing, illegibility of the, protects printers in suits for damages, 15.

ADVERTISEMENTS.

READINGS FOR HOME HALL AND SCHOOL

Prepared by Professor LEWIS B. MONROE Founder of the Boston School of Oratory

HUMOROUS READINGS In prose and verse. For the use of schools reading-clubs public and parlor entertainments $1.50

“The book is readable from the first page to the last, and every article contained in it is worth more than the price of the volume.”—Providence Herald.

MISCELLANEOUS READINGS In prose and verse $1.50

“We trust this book may find its way into many schools, not to be used as a book for daily drill, but as affording the pupil occasionally an opportunity of leaving the old beaten track.”—Rhode-Island Schoolmaster.

DIALOGUES AND DRAMAS For the use of dramatic and reading clubs and for public social and school entertainments $1.50

“If the acting of dramas such as are contained in this book, could be introduced into private circles, there would be an inducement for the young to spend their evenings at home, instead of resorting to questionable public places.”—Nashua Gazette.

YOUNG FOLKS’ READINGS For social and public entertainment $1.50

“Professor Monroe is one of the most successful teachers of elocution, as well as a very popular public reader. In this volume he has given an unusually fine selection for home and social reading, as well as for public entertainments.”—Boston Home Journal.

DIALOGUES FROM DICKENS Arranged for schools and home amusement By W. ELIOT FETTE A.M. First series $1.00

DIALOGUES AND DRAMAS FROM DICKENS Second series Arranged by W. ELIOT FETTE Illustrated $1.00

The dialogues in the above books are selected from the best points of the stories, and can be extended by taking several scenes together.

THE GRAND DICKENS COSMORAMA Comprising several unique entertainments capable of being used separately for school home or hall By G. B. BARTLETT Paper 25 cents

THE READINGS OF DICKENS as condensed by himself for his own use $1.00

LITTLE PIECES FOR LITTLE SPEAKERS The primary-school teacher’s assistant By a practical teacher 16mo. Illustrated Cloth 75 cents Also in boards 50 cents

THE MODEL SUNDAY-SCHOOL SPEAKER Containing selections in prose and verse from the most popular pieces and dialogues for Sunday-school exhibitions Illustrated Cloth 75 cents Boards 50 cents

“A book very much needed.”

Sold by all booksellers or sent by mail postpaid on receipt of price

LEE AND SHEPARD Publishers Boston

GEO. M. BAKER’S POPULAR READERS SPEAKERS AND DRAMAS

THE READING CLUB and Handy Speaker Being selections in prose and poetry Serious humorous pathetic patriotic and dramatic In 18 parts of 50 selections each Each part cloth 50 cents paper 15 cents

THE POPULAR SPEAKER Containing the selections published in the Reading Club Nos. 13 14 15 and 16 Cloth $1.00

THE PREMIUM SPEAKER Containing the selections published in the Reading Club Nos. 9 10 11 and 12 Cloth $1.00

THE PRIZE SPEAKER Containing the selections published in the Reading Club Nos. 5 6 7 and 8 Cloth $1.00

THE HANDY SPEAKER Combining the selections published in the Reading Club Nos. 1 2 3 and 4 Cloth Over 400 pages $1.00

BAKER’S HUMOROUS SPEAKER A compilation of popular selections in prose and verse in Irish Dutch Negro and Yankee dialect Uniform with “The Handy Speaker” “The Prize Speaker” “The Popular Speaker” “The Premium Speaker” Cloth $1.00

Baker’s Dialect Recitations

YANKEE DIALECT RECITATIONS A humorous collection of the best stories and poems for reading and recitations Boards 50 cents Paper 30 cents

MEDLEY DIALECT RECITATIONS A series of the most popular German French and Scotch readings Boards 50 cents Paper 30 cents

IRISH DIALECT RECITATIONS A series of popular readings and recitations in prose and verse Boards 50 cents Paper 30 cents

NEGRO DIALECT RECITATIONS A series of the most popular readings in prose and verse Boards 50 cents Paper 30 cents

THE GRAND ARMY SPEAKER A collection of the best readings and recitations on the Civil War Boards 50 cents Paper 30 cents

Baker’s Original Plays and Dialogues

A BAKER’S DOZEN Thirteen Original Humorous Dialogues Cloth 75 cents Boards 50 cents

THE TEMPERANCE DRAMA Eight Original Plays 16mo. Cloth 75 cents Fancy boards 50 cents

THE EXHIBITION DRAMA Original Plays Dramas Comedies Farces Dialogues etc. $1.50

HANDY DRAMAS FOR AMATEUR ACTORS Cloth $1.50

THE DRAWING-ROOM STAGE Dramas Farces and Comedies for the amateur stage home theatricals and school exhibitions Ill. $1.50

THE SOCIAL STAGE Dramas Comedies Farces Dialogues etc. for home and school Illustrated $1.50

THE MIMIC STAGE A new collection of Dramas Farces Comedies and Burlesques for parlor theatricals evening entertainments and school exhibitions Illustrated $1.50

AMATEUR DRAMAS For parlor theatricals evening entertainments and school exhibitions Illustrated $1.50

THE GLOBE DRAMA Original Plays Illustrated $1.50

Sold by all booksellers or sent by mail postpaid on receipt of price

LEE AND SHEPARD Publishers Boston

ADVANCED ELOCUTIONARY BOOKS

ADVANCED READINGS AND RECITATIONS By AUSTIN B. FLETCHER A.M. LL.B. late professor of oratory Brown University and Boston University School of Law This book has been already adopted in a large number of universities, colleges, post-graduate schools of law and theology, seminaries, etc. $1.50

“Professor Fletcher’s noteworthy compilation has been made with rare rhetorical judgment, and evinces a sympathy for the best forms of literature, adapted to attract readers and speakers, and mould their literary taste.”—Professor J. W. CHURCHILL, Andover Theological Seminary.

THE BOOK OF ELOQUENCE A collection of extracts in prose and verse from the most famous orators and poets By CHARLES DUDLEY WARNER $1.50

“What can be said that is more eloquent praise than that Charles Dudley Warner has carefully selected three hundred and sixty-four specimens of the choicest things from the world’s literature? If there is any subject untouched, we fail to discover it. It is a compendium of the world’s eloquence. It is useless to tell who is in here, for everybody is; and it is clear that Mr. Warner has made his extracts with great care. It has the most eloquence ever packed into twice as many pages.”

VOCAL AND ACTION LANGUAGE, CULTURE AND EXPRESSION New edition By E. N. KIRBY instructor in elocution in Harvard University $1.25

“This is a treatise, at once scientific and practical, on the theory and art of elocution. It treats of the structure of the vocal organs, of vocal culture and expression, of action-language, gesticulation, the use of the body and hands in oratory, etc. There is also a well-arranged collection of extracts for elocution. The work is well adapted for use as a text-book on elocution, and for study by professional students.”—Indianapolis Journal.

FIVE-MINUTE READINGS Selected and adapted by WALTER K. FOBES 50 cents

FIVE-MINUTE DECLAMATIONS Selected and adapted by WALTER K. FOBES teacher of elocution and public reader 50 cents

FIVE-MINUTE RECITATIONS By WALTER K. FOBES 50 cents

Pupils in public schools, on declamation days, are limited to five minutes each for the delivery of “pieces.” There is a great complaint of the scarcity of material for such a purpose, while the injudicious pruning of eloquent extracts has often marred the desired effects. To obviate these difficulties new “Five-Minute” books have been prepared by a competent teacher.

“We have never before seen packed in so small a compass so much that may be considered really representative of the higher class of oratory.”—Boston Transcript.

ELOCUTION SIMPLIFIED With an appendix on Lisping, Stammering and other Impediments of Speech By WALTER K. FOBES graduate of the “Boston School of Oratory” Cloth 50 cents. Paper 30 cents

“The whole art of elocution is succinctly set forth in this small volume, which might be judiciously included among the text-books of schools.”—New Orleans Picayune.

Sold by all booksellers or sent by mail postpaid on receipt of price

LEE AND SHEPARD Publishers Boston

LEE AND SHEPARD’S POPULAR HANDBOOKS

Price, each, in cloth, 50 cents, except when other price is given.

Forgotten Meanings; or an Hour with a Dictionary. By ALFRED WAITES, author of Historical Student’s Manual.

Handbook of Elocution Simplified. By WALTER K. FOBES, with an Introduction by GEORGE M. BAKER.

Handbook of English Synonyms. With an Appendix, showing the Correct Use of Prepositions; also a Collection of Foreign Phrases. By LOOMIS J. CAMPBELL.

Handbook of Conversation. Its Faults and its Graces. Compiled by ANDREW P. PEABODY, D.D., LL.D. Comprising: (1) Dr. PEABODY’S Address; (2) Mr. TRENCH’S Lecture; (3) Mr. PARRY GWYNNE’S “A Word to the Wise; or, Hints on the Current Improprieties of Expression in Reading and Writing;” (4) Mistakes and Improprieties of Speaking and Writing Corrected.

Handbook of Punctuation and other Typographical Matters. For the Use of Printers, Authors, Teachers, and Scholars. By MARSHALL T. BIGELOW, Corrector at the University Press, Cambridge, Mass.

Handbook of Blunders. Designed to prevent 1,000 common blunders in writing and speaking. By HARLAN H. BALLARD, A.M., Principal of Lenox Academy, Lenox, Mass.

Broken English. A Frenchman’s Struggle in the English Language. Instructive as a handbook of French conversation. By Professor E. C. DUBOIS.

Beginnings with the Microscope. A working handbook containing simple instructions in the art and method of using the microscope, and preparing articles for examination. By WALTER P. MANTON.

Field Botany. A Handbook for the Collector. Containing instructions for gathering and preserving Plants, and the formation of an Herbarium. Also complete instructions in Leaf Photography, Plant Printing, and the Skeletonizing of Leaves. By WALTER P. MANTON.

Taxidermy without a Teacher. Comprising a complete manual of instructions for Preparing and Preserving Birds, Animals, and Fishes, with a chapter on Hunting and Hygiene; together with instructions for Preserving Eggs, and Making Skeletons, and a number of valuable recipes. By WALTER P. MANTON.

Insects. How to Catch and how to Prepare them for the Cabinet. A Manual of Instruction for the Field-Naturalist. By W. P. MANTON.

What is to be Done? A Handbook for the Nursery, with Useful Hints for Children and Adults. By ROBERT B. DIXON, M.D.

Whirlwinds, Cyclones, and Tornadoes. By WILLIAM MORRIS DAVIS, Instructor in Harvard College. Illustrated.

Mistakes in Writing English, and How to Avoid Them. For the use of all who Teach, Write, or Speak the language. By MARSHALL T. BIGELOW.

Warrington’s Manual. A Manual for the Information of Officers and Members of Legislatures, Conventions, Societies, etc., in the practical governing and membership of all such bodies, according to the Parliamentary Law and Practice in the United States. By W. S. ROBINSON (Warrington).

Practical Boat-Sailing. By DOUGLAS FRAZAR. Classic size, $1.00. With numerous diagrams and illustrations.

Handbook of Wood Engraving. With practical instructions in the art, for persons wishing to learn without an instructor. By WILLIAM A. EMERSON. Illustrated. Price $1.00.

Five-Minute Recitations. Selected and arranged by WALTER K. FOBES.

Five-Minute Declamations. Selected and arranged by WALTER K. FOBES.

Five-Minute Readings for Young Ladies. Selected and adapted by WALTER K. FOBES.

Educational Psychology. A Treatise for Parents and Educators. By LOUISE PARSONS HOPKINS, Supervisor in Boston Public Schools.

The Nation in a Nutshell. A Rapid Outline of American History. By GEORGE MAKEPEACE TOWLE.

English Synonymes Discriminated. By RICHARD WHATELY, D.D., Archbishop of Dublin. A new edition.

Hints on Writing and Speech-making. By THOMAS WENTWORTH HIGGINSON.

Arithmetic for Young Children. Being a series of Exercises exemplifying the manner in which Arithmetic should be taught to young children. By HORACE GRANT. American Edition. Edited by WILLARD SMALL.

Bridge Disasters in America. The Cause and the Remedy. By Prof. GEORGE L. VOSE.

A Few Thoughts for a Young Man. By HORACE MANN. A new Edition.

Handbook of Debate. The Character of Julius Cæsar. Adapted from J. SHERIDAN KNOWLES. Arranged for Practice in Speaking, for Debating Clubs, and Classes in Public and Private Schools.

Exercises for the Improvement of the Senses. For Young Children. By HORACE GRANT, author of “Arithmetic for Young Children.” Edited by WILLARD SMALL.

Hints on Language in connection with Sight-Reading and Writing in Primary and Intermediate Schools. By S. ARTHUR BENT, A.M., Superintendent of Public Schools, Clinton, Mass.

The Hunter’s Handbook. Containing lists of provisions and camp paraphernalia, and hints on the fire, cooking utensils, etc.; with approved receipts for camp-cookery. By “An OLD HUNTER.”

Universal Phonography; or, Shorthand by the “Allen Method.” A self-instructor. By G. G. ALLEN.

Hints and Helps for those who Write, Print, or Read. By B. DREW, proof-reader.

Pronouncing Handbook of Three Thousand Words often Mispronounced. By R. SOULE and L. J. CAMPBELL.

Short Studies of American Authors. By THOMAS WENTWORTH HIGGINSON.

The Stars and the Earth; or, Thoughts upon Space, Time, and Eternity. With an introduction by THOMAS HILL, D.D., LL.D.

Handbook of the Earth. Natural Methods in Geography. By LOUISA PARSONS HOPKINS, teacher of Normal Methods in the Swain Free School, New Bedford.

Natural-History Plays. Dialogues and Recitations for School Exhibitions. By LOUISA P. HOPKINS.

The Telephone. An account of the phenomena of Electricity, Magnetism, and Sound, with directions for making a speaking-telephone. By Professor A. E. DOLBEAR.

Lessons on Manners. By EDITH E. WIGGIN.

Water Analysis. A Handbook for Water-Drinkers. By G. L. AUSTIN, M.D.

Handbook of Light Gymnastics. By LUCY B. HUNT, instructor in gymnastics at Smith (female) College, Northampton, Mass.

The Parlor Gardener. A Treatise on the House-Culture of Ornamental Plants. By CORNELIA J. RANDOLPH. With illustrations.

Sold by all booksellers, and sent by mail, postpaid, on receipt of price.

LEE AND SHEPARD Publishers Boston

BRIGHT AND BREEZY BOOKS OF TRAVEL, BY SIX BRIGHT WOMEN

A WINTER IN CENTRAL AMERICA AND MEXICO

By HELEN J. SANBORN. Cloth, $1.50.

“A bright, attractive narrative by a wide-awake Boston girl.”

A SUMMER IN THE AZORES, with a Glimpse of Madeira

By Miss C. ALICE BAKER. Little Classic style. Cloth, gilt edges, $1.25.

“Miss Baker gives us a breezy, entertaining description of these picturesque islands. She is an observing traveller, and makes a graphic picture of the quaint people and customs.”—Chicago Advance.

LIFE AT PUGET SOUND

With sketches of travel in Washington Territory, British Columbia, Oregon, and California. By CAROLINE C. LEIGHTON. 16mo, cloth, $1.50.

“Your chapters on Puget Sound have charmed me. Full of life, deeply interesting, and with just that class of facts, and suggestions of truth, that cannot fail to help the Indian and the Chinese.”—WENDELL PHILLIPS.

EUROPEAN BREEZES

By MARGERY DEANE. Cloth, gilt top, $1.50. Being chapters of travel through Germany, Austria, Hungary, and Switzerland, covering places not usually visited by Americans in making “the Grand Tour of the Continent,” by the accomplished writer of “Newport Breezes.”

“A very bright, fresh and amusing account, which tells us about a host of things we never heard of before, and is worth two ordinary books of European travel.”—Woman’s Journal.

BEATEN PATHS; or, A Woman’s Vacation in Europe

By ELLA W. THOMPSON. 16mo, cloth, $1.50.

A lively and chatty book of travel, with pen-pictures humorous and graphic, that are decidedly out of the “beaten paths” of description.

AN AMERICAN GIRL ABROAD

By Miss ADELINE TRAFTON, author of “His Inheritance,” “Katherine Earle,” etc. 16mo. Illustrated. $1.50.

“A sparkling account of a European trip by a wide-awake, intelligent, and irrepressible American girl. Pictured with a freshness and vivacity that is delightful.”—Utica Observer.

CURTIS GUILD’S TRAVELS

BRITONS AND MUSCOVITES; or, Traits of Two Empires

Cloth, $2.00.

OVER THE OCEAN; or, Sights and Scenes in Foreign Lands

By CURTIS GUILD, editor of “The Boston Commercial Bulletin” Crown 8vo. Cloth, $2.50.

“The utmost that any European tourist can hope to do is to tell the old story in a somewhat fresh way, and Mr. Guild has succeeded in every part of his book in doing this.”—Philadelphia Bulletin.

ABROAD AGAIN; or, Fresh Forays in Foreign Fields

Uniform with “Over the Ocean.” By the same author. Crown 8vo. Cloth, $2.50.

“He has given us a life-picture. Europe is done in a style that must serve as an invaluable guide to those who go ‘over the ocean,’ as well as an interesting companion.”—Halifax Citizen.

Sold by all booksellers, and sent by mail, postpaid, on receipt of price

LEE AND SHEPARD Publishers Boston

NARRATIVES OF NOTED TRAVELLERS

GERMANY SEEN WITHOUT SPECTACLES; or, Random Sketches of Various Subjects, Penned from Different Standpoints in the Empire

By HENRY RUGGLES, late United States Consul at the Island of Malta, and at Barcelona, Spain. $1.50.

“Mr. Ruggles writes briskly: he chats and gossips, slashing right and left with stout American prejudices, and has made withal a most entertaining book.”—New-York Tribune.

TRAVELS AND OBSERVATIONS IN THE ORIENT, with a Hasty Flight in the Countries of Europe

By WALTER HARRIMAN (ex-Governor of New Hampshire). $1.50.

“The author, in his graphic description of these sacred localities, refers with great aptness to scenes and personages which history has made famous. It is a chatty narrative of travel.”—Concord Monitor.

FORE AND AFT

A Story of Actual Sea-Life. By ROBERT B. DIXON, M.D. $1.25.

Travels in Mexico, with vivid descriptions of manners and customs, form a large part of this striking narrative of a fourteen-months’ voyage.

VOYAGE OF THE PAPER CANOE

A Geographical Journey of Twenty-five Hundred Miles from Quebec to the Gulf of Mexico. By NATHANIEL H. BISHOP. With numerous illustrations and maps specially prepared for this work. Crown 8vo. $1.50.

“Mr. Bishop did a very bold thing, and has described it with a happy mixture of spirit, keen observation, and bonhomie.”—London Graphic.

FOUR MONTHS IN A SNEAK-BOX

A Boat Voyage of Twenty-six Hundred Miles down the Ohio and Mississippi Rivers, and along the Gulf of Mexico. By Nathaniel H. Bishop. With numerous maps and illustrations. $1.50.

“His glowing pen-pictures of ‘shanty-boat’ life on the great rivers are true to life. His descriptions of persons and places are graphic.”—Zion’s Herald.

A THOUSAND MILES’ WALK ACROSS SOUTH AMERICA, Over the Pampas and the Andes

By NATHANIEL H. BISHOP. Crown 8vo. New edition. Illustrated. $1.50.

“Mr. Bishop made this journey when a boy of sixteen, has never forgotten it, and tells it in such a way that the reader will always remember it, and wish there had been more.”

CAMPS IN THE CARIBBEES

Being the Adventures of a Naturalist Bird-hunting in the West-India Islands. By FRED A. OBER. New edition. With maps and illustrations. $1.50.

“During two years he visited mountains, forests, and people, that few, if any, tourists had ever reached before. He carried his camera with him, and photographed from nature the scenes by which the book is illustrated.”—Louisville Courier-Journal.

ENGLAND FROM A BACK WINDOW; With Views of Scotland and Ireland

By J. M. BAILEY, the “‘Danbury News’ Man.” 12mo. $1.00.

“The peculiar humor of this writer is well known. The British Isles have never before been looked at in just the same way,—at least, not by any one who has notified us of the fact. Mr. Bailey’s travels possess, accordingly, a value of their own for the reader, no matter how many previous records of journeys in the mother country he may have read.”—Rochester Express.

Sold by all booksellers, and sent by mail, postpaid, on receipt of price

LEE AND SHEPARD Publishers Boston

EVERY-DAY BUSINESS, PRACTICAL NOTES ON ITS DETAILS

Arranged for Young People by M. S. EMERY
Price, cloth, 50 cents

An accurate knowledge of how to attend to the every-day affairs of a business life is, indeed, a most valuable possession. The requirements of modern business life are manifold and exacting, demanding technical information, and, besides, quite a degree of what may justly be termed “cultivation.” This valuable and indispensable book covers a wide range of information of much importance, and is designed as a text-book for schools, and for ready reference for young people and those who need such instruction as it contains. It treats in an attractive and clear manner subjects which bear on every-day callings, like “Letter-writing,” by which so large a percentage of business is conducted; “Bills, Receipts, and Accounts;” “Post-Office Business,” with instructions regarding late advantages and scope of accommodation; “Telegrams,” “Express Business,” “United States Money,” “Savings Banks,” “National Banks,” “Bank Checks,” “Notes and Drafts,” “Mortgages,” “Investment and Speculation,” “Taxes,” “Fire Insurance,” and “Life Insurance.” These are topics conveying a general idea of the worth of the book—topics about which business men must know, and covering that which they who would be business men must learn. Keeping relatively abreast of modern methods, the educators of our day see the necessity of imparting business knowledge, as well as that which is purely scientific, historical, or literary in its nature; hence, the adaptability of “Every-Day Business” to the necessities of American schools and our progressive ways of life.

AN HOUR WITH DELSARTE

A STUDY OF EXPRESSION, by Anna Morgan, of the Chicago Conservatory. Illustrated by Rosa Mueller Sprague and Marian Reynolds, with full-page figure illustrations, 4to, cloth, $2.00.

“This beautiful quarto volume presents the ideas of Delsarte in words which all may understand. It is explicit and comprehensible. No one can read this book or study its twenty-two graceful and graphic illustrations without perceiving the possibility of adding strength and expression to gestures and movements, as well as simplicity and ease. Mr. Turveydrop went through life with universal approval, simply by his admirable ‘deportment.’ Every young person may profitably take a hint from his success, and this book will be found invaluable as an instructor.”—Woman’s Journal, Boston.

“‘Flexibility and grace’ are the watchwords of this great teacher, and it must be conceded that the charming young ladies who serve as models throughout the book have their share of these two desiderata of expression; this book gives an altogether charming insight into Delsarte’s system, and no young lady who desires to acquire ease of manner and grace of carriage could do better than to read it carefully. The style is quite in keeping with the subject, light, graceful, and entertaining.”—American Stationer.

Sold by all booksellers and sent by mail postpaid on receipt of price

LEE AND SHEPARD Publishers Boston

TOOLS FOR THE TEACHER’S WORKSHOP

METHODS AND AIDS IN TEACHING GEOGRAPHY

By CHARLES F. KING A.M. Head-master of the Dearborn School Boston Price $1.60 net

“This is a work independent of any geography, and may be used by teachers equally well with any of the authorized text-books. The numerous illustrations in this volume are of a practical nature, being generally diagrams, charts, and simple devices, such as a teacher may easily draw upon a blackboard to illustrate the teaching of geography, and the book will be received as an excellent addition to the aids which modern instructors desire in their work.”

EXCELLENT QUOTATIONS for Home and School

For the Use of Teachers and Pupils By JULIA P. HOITT Deputy Superintendent of Public Instruction State of California Cloth 75 cents net

“Contains choice excerpts from the productions of eminent authors, at home and abroad, in prose and poetry. Poetry of the highest order, eloquent biographical eulogies, patriotic selections, recitations for young pupils, and several pages of proverbs, give this book a secure place in the home and school.”

CHIPS FROM A TEACHER’S WORKSHOP

By L. R. KLEMM Ph.D. late Superintendent of Public Schools Hamilton Ohio Cloth $1.20 net

“This work is among the first we have ever seen that puts the young teacher on the right track and keeps him there through all the departments of his work. It is throughout based upon common sense. It teaches principles, but the principles are always presented concretely in a form to be understood. This is really the teacher’s vade mecum. If it could be put into the hands of every instructor in our public schools, it would work a revolution in our methods of education and in the results achieved.”—School Journal.

Dr. Klemm has now in preparation, nearly ready for publication, his second volume, entitled “Chips from Educational Workshops in Europe.”

FIRST STEPS WITH AMERICAN AND BRITISH AUTHORS

By ALBERT F. BLAISDELL A.M. author of “Study in the English Classics” “Our Bodies and How we Live” “How to Keep Well” “Child’s Book of Health” Cloth 75 cents net

“The plan of the book is unique, attractive, and thoroughly philosophical. In a general way, the plan is to study the text of a few representative authors, and not merely to read about many authors. It is to study what great authors have written, and not what some one has written about them. Every thing is made subordinate to this great aim. In the first few chapters, the method of studying a given subject is fully explained and illustrated.”—True Education.

METHODS IN ZOOLOGY TEACHING FOR BEGINNERS

For Teachers in Common Schools By WALTER P. MANTON M.D. author of “Field Botany” “Insects” “Beginnings with the Microscope” “Taxidermy” Cloth 50 cents

Dr. Manton has been very successful in his practical helps in various branches of study, and this manual will prove welcome to all interested in this subject. The book is clearly and concisely written, and the directions are plain and to the point, the different instruments and tools necessary being fully illustrated and explained.

HOW SHALL MY CHILD BE TAUGHT?

Practical Pedagogy or the Science of Teaching Illustrated By LOUISA PARSONS HOPKINS Supervisor in Boston Public Schools Cloth $1.20 net

“The Boston Herald” says: “Mrs. Louisa Parsons Hopkins has made a careful study of the science of teaching, and her book will be of the greatest service to those who are engaged in the tasks of primary teaching. She is less didactic than experimental in her methods; but the points which she makes are those that lead to success, because they have been proved in the schoolroom, and have the authority of the great schoolmasters of modern times.”

Sold by all booksellers, and when sent by mail, ten per cent to be added for postage

LEE AND SHEPARD Publishers Boston

TRANSCRIBER’S NOTE

Original spelling and grammar have been generally retained, with some exceptions noted below. Original printed page numbers are shown like this: {p52}. Footnotes have been relabeled 1–7, and moved from within paragraphs to nearby locations between paragraphs. I produced the cover image and hereby assign it to the public domain. Original page images are available from archive.org—search for “penstypes00drew”.

The turned comma in ‹MʻDonough› on page 119 is a glyph (Unicode character [‹ʻ› U+02BB; modifier letter turned comma]) that is not well supported in current browsers. It is retained in the simple text edition, but an image is substituted in the html, epub, and mobi editions. On page 122, the x with combining cedilla has been rendered as an image in all but the text edition. Other Unicode characters rendered as images include: Arabic semicolon, double high-reversed-9 quotation mark, single high-reversed-9 quotation mark, asterism, double vertical line, and white right pointing index. Many glyphs that are not included in the Unicode system are represented as ‹[Symbol]› in the text edition, and as images in the other editions.

- Page 68. The phrase ‹“Gunther’s Cat-Fish., Brit. Mus.,—which,› was changed to ‹“Gunther’s Cat-Fish., Brit. Mus.”,—which,›.

- Page 91. The text posits as a rule, ‹A thin space should be placed before, and also after, a dash.› Unfortunately, the Project Gutenberg “House Style” has overruled Benjamin Drew’s rule in these ebook editions.

- Pages 127–154. In the Orthography lists, Webster and Worcester, a few words appear to be out of order, but have been retained as originally printed. For example, there is the sequence [Reposit, Resin, Rosin, Resistance] on page 151.

- Page 145. The word ‹Enclyclopædia› was changed to ‹Encyclopædia›.

- Page 155. The word ‹Affiiliable› was changed to ‹Affilliable›.

- Page 168. The enlarged left curly bracket was eliminated from the entry ‹Portico›.

- Page 191. The phrase ‹a biger man› is retained.

- Page 195–199. Chapter VIII was originally printed in an Old Style which included the long “ſ” and several obsolete or font-dependent ligatures such as “ct”. Sadly, only the ſ can be represented in this ebook. For the html, epub, and mobi editions, an image of the ct ligature has been provided. But to see all the ligatures as originally printed, you must seek out the original page scans.

- Page 201. Captions were constructed for the three illustrations on this page, based on the text of page 199.

- Page 215. A new heading ‹ADVERTISEMENTS› was inserted for this section. Text styling in this section has been considerably simplified.

- Page 207. The page reference for topic ‹Advertisement› was changed to 5–7.

- Page 224. The word ‹thoroughout› was changed to ‹throughout›.

*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK PENS AND TYPES ***

Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will be renamed.

Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away—you may do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license, especially commercial redistribution.

START: FULL LICENSE

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE

PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project Gutenberg License available with this file or online at www.gutenberg.org/license.

Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg electronic works

1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property (trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg electronic works in your possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project Gutenberg electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the United States and you are located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project Gutenberg mission of promoting free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you share it without charge with others.

1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project Gutenberg work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any country other than the United States.

1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before using this eBook.

1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked to the Project Gutenberg License for all works posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg.

1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project Gutenberg License.

1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version posted on the official Project Gutenberg website (www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing access to or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided that:

- • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”

- • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.

- • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of receipt of the work.

- • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works.

1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment.

1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg work, and (c) any Defect you cause.

Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg

Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure and permanent future for Project Gutenberg and future generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.

Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit 501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws.

The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza #516, Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact

Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate.

Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg electronic works

Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project Gutenberg eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.

Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.

Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility: www.gutenberg.org.

This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.

Table of Contents

- PENS AND TYPES OR HINTS AND HELPS FOR THOSE WHO WRITE, PRINT, READ, TEACH, OR LEARN

- PUBLISHERS’ ADVERTISEMENT.

- PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION.

- PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION.

- CONTENTS.

- CHAPTER I. WRITING FOR THE PRESS.

- CHAPTER II. PROOF-READING.

- MEMORANDA FOR PROOF-READERS.

- MARKS USED IN CORRECTING PROOFS.

- SPECIMEN OF FIRST PROOF.

- SPECIMEN OF FIRST PROOF.

- READING GREEK.

- EXAMPLE FOR READING.

- WORDS TO GO IN ITALICS.

- WORDS TO GO IN ROMAN.

- CHAPTER III. STYLE.

- CHAPTER IV. GENERAL REMARKS: CONTAINING SOME ILLUSTRATIONS OF, AND ADDITIONS TO, THE SUBJECT-MATTER OF THE FOREGOING THREE CHAPTERS.

- CHAPTER V. PUNCTUATION.

- RULES OF PUNCTUATION.

- I. PERIOD, OR FULL POINT.

- II. COLON.

- III. SEMICOLON.

- IV. COMMA.

- V. THE NOTE OF INTERROGATION.

- VI. THE NOTE OE EXCLAMATION.

- VII. THE DASH.

- VIII. VARIOUS MARKS USED IN WRITING AND PRINTING.

- CHAPTER VI. ORTHOGRAPHY.

- THE WEBSTER LIST.

- THE WORCESTER LIST.

- WORDS ENDING IN ABLE.

- WORDS ENDING IN “ABLE”; RARE.

- WORDS ENDING IN “ABLE”; OBSOLETE.

- WORDS ENDING IN IBLE.

- WORDS ENDING IN “IBLE”; RARE.

- WORDS ENDING IN “IBLE”; OBSOLETE.

- NOUNS ENDING IN O.

- WORDS ENDING IN ISE.

- EI AND IE.

- WORDS ENDING IN “CION.”

- ENSURE, INSURE, ETC.

- CHAPTER VII. CAPITALIZATION.

- RULES FOR THE RIGHT USE OF CAPITALS.

- RECAPITULATION.

- CHAPTER VIII. OLD STYLE.

- CHAPTER IX. TECHNICAL TERMS USED IN THIS WORK.

- CHAPTER X.

- VARIOUS SIZES OF ROMAN LETTER—MODERN.

- VARIOUS SIZES OF ROMAN LETTER—OLD STYLE.

- INDEX.

- ADVERTISEMENTS.

- THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE